Fundamentals 0f Aer0dynamics

.NAVAL AIR TRAINING COMMAND NAS CORPUS CHRISTI. TEXAS

,.

CNATRA P-101 (REV. S-98) PAT

FUNDAMENTALS OF

AERODYNAMICS

,

MAY 1998

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY CHIEF OF NAVAL AIR TRAINING CNATRA 250 LEXINGTON BLVD SUITE 102 CORPUS CHRISTI TX 7841&-5041

1542 N3121

1 2 MAY 1998 1. CNATRAPUB, P202 (Rev. 5-98), FUNDAMENTALS OF AERODYNAMICS STUDENT GUIDE for Aviation Preflight Indoctrination, Naval Aviation Schools Command is issued for information, standardization of instruction and guidance of instructors and students in the Naval Air Training Command. 2. This publication will be used to supplement the Aerodynamics syllabus in the Academics Department of Naval Aviation Schools Command. 3. Recommeodations for changes shall be submitted to the Commanding Officer, Naval Aviation Schools Command. Questions concerning Preflight academics should be referred to Mr. Orville Hemphill, CNATRA N3121, DSN 861-3993, COMM (512) 961-3993 . CNATRA N3 FAX is DSN 861-3398. 4. CNATRA PUB P-202 (Rev. 3-98) is hereby canceled and superseded.

AL/{?~

/ct~41PITTMAN

Assistant Chief of Staff for Training and Operations Distribution: CNATRAN3 (03) NAV AVSCOLSCOM (1,000)

•

STUDENT GUIDE FOR

PREFLIGHT 0-9B-0020 UNIT 1

FUNDAMENTALS OF AERODYNAMICS Prepared by

NAVAL AVIATION SCHOOLS COMMAND 181 CHAMBERS AVE SUITE C PENSACOLA, FL 32508-5221

Prepared for

CHIEF OF NAVAL AIR TRAINING 250 LEXINGTON BLVD SUITE 102 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78419-5041

APR IL 1998

CHANGE RECORD

Number

Description of Change

2

Entered by

Date

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Change Record .............................................................................................................. Table of Contents ........................................................................................................... Safety Notice.................................................................................................................. How to Use This Student Guide ..... ................................................................................ Class Schedule ...............................................................................................................

2 3 5 6 7

UNIT 1 Fundamentals of Aerodynamics Lesson Topic 1.1 Basic Properties of Physics Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.1-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.1-3 Lesson Topic 1.2 Airplane Terminology Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.2-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.2-3 Lesson Topic 1.3 Basic Aerodynamic Principles Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.3-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.3-3 Lesson Topic 1.4 Lift and Stalls Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.4-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.4-4 Lesson Topic 1.5 Drag Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.5-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.5-3 Lesson Topic 1.6 Thrust and Power Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.6-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.6<3 Lesson Topic 1.7 Aircraft Performance Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.7-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.7-3

3

Lesson Topic 1.8 Aircraft Control Systems Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.8-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.8-3 Lesson Topic 1.9 Stability Assignment Sheet. .......................................................................................... 1.9-1 Information Sheet ........................................................................................... 1.9-3 Lesson Topic 1.10 Spins Assignment Sheet. ........................................................................................ 1.10-1 Information Sheet ... ..................................................................................·.... 1.10-2 Lesson Topic 1.11 Turning Flight Assignment Sheet. ........................................................................................ 1.11-1 Information Sheet ......................................................................................... 1.11-3 Lesson Topic 1.12 Takeoff/Landing Performance, Wake Turbulence and Wind Shear Assignment Sh~et. ........................................................................................ 1.12-1 Information Sheet ......................................................................................... 1.12-3

Appendix 1.A Glossary......................................................................................... 1.A-1 Appendix 1.B Answers to Study Questions .......................................................... 1.B-1 Appendix 1.C Study Guide ................................................................................... 1.C-1 Appendix 1.0 Bibliography ................................................................................... 1.0-1 Appendix 1.E Change Recommendation ............................................................. 1.E-1

4

SECURITY AWARENESS NOTICE

This course does not contain any classified material.

SAFETY NOTICE

All personnel must be reminded that personal injury, death or equipment damage can result from carelessness, failure to comply with approved procedures, or violations of warnings, cautions, and safety regulations.

SAFETY I HAZARD AWARENESS NOTICE

a. Safe training is the number one goal. Each year at training commands, lives are lost and thousands of man hours and millions of dollars are wasted as the result of accidents. Most of these accidents could have been prevented. They are the result of actions performed incorrectly, either knowingly or unknowingly, by people who fail to exercise sufficient foresight, lack the requisite training, knowledge, or motivation, or who fail to recognize and report hazards. b. A mishap is any unplanned or unexpected event causing personnel injury, occupational illness, death, material loss or damage or an explosion whether damage occurs or not. c. A near miss or hazardous condition is any situation where if allowed to go unchecked or uncorrected has the potential to cause a mishap. d. It is the responsibility of all Department of Defense personnel to report all mishaps and near misses. If a mishap, hazardous condition or near miss occurs let your instructor know immediately. e. Students will report all hazardous conditions and near misses to the command high-risk safety officer via their divisionaVdepartmental high-risk safety officer. Reports can be hand written on the appropriate form. Injuries shall be reported on the appropriate form. f. For students at Air Force installations, report these conditions to their safety officer or flight commander.

5

HOW TO USE THIS STUDENT GUIDE

This publication is for your use while studying aerodynamics. It is designed to be specific to the T-34C and the T-378. It will also provide you with a basic foundation which you will build upon during training in more advanced aircraft. You may mark any pages in this book, including information sheets and assignment sheets. When filled in, this guide will become a useful reference. You may not use it during testing. T-34C students are not responsible for T-378 specific information and T-378 students are not responsible for T-34C specific information. The aerodynamics unit is presented in two sections. The first section is divided into Lesson Topics 1 through 6 covering basic principles of physics, aircraft terminology. basic aerodynamic principles. lift. drag. thrust and power. The second section is divided into Lesson Topics 7 through 12 covering more advanced topics such as airplane performance. controls. stability, spins, turning flight, and takeoff and landing performance. The knowledge to be acquired is stated for each topic so that you can check your progress. It is to your advantage to review the learning objectives prior to the class presentation. Assignments in this guide are given for study. The effectiveness of the guide depends upon the conscientious accomplishment of the reading and study assignments. Participation in a study group is highly recommended. Statistical analysis suggests that a study group of four members is optimum. A written examination will be administered on the material following the completion of each section of aerodynamics. Page numbers in this student guide consist of three parts: the unit number (1 for Aerodynamics), followed by a decimal point, the lesson topic number (1 through 12), followed by a dash (-). and finally, the page number within the lesson topic.

6

CLASS SCHEDULE

Topic No.

Topic

Type

Hours

1.1

Class

1.0

Basic Properties of Physics

1.2

Class

1.0

Aircraft Terminology

1.3

Class

1.0

Basic Aerodynamic Principles

1.4

Class

2.0

Lift and Stalls

1.5

Class

1.0

Drag

1.6

Class

2.0

Thrust and Power/Review

1.1-1.6

Exam

2.0

Aerodynamics Midterm Examination

1.7

Class

2.0

Aircraft Performance

1.8

Class

1.0

Aircraft Control Systems

1.9

Class

2.0

Stability

1.10

Class

1.0

Spins

1.11

Class

2.0

Turning Flight

1.12

Class

2.0

Takeoff/Landing Performance, Wake Turbulence and Wind Shear/Review

1.7-1.12

Exam

2.0

Aerodynamics Final Examination

22.0

7

(This page intentionally left blank)

8

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Basic Properties of Physics Assignment Sheet No. 1.1.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding basic physics as it relates to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic:

1.1

Define scalar quantity, vector, force, mass, volume, density, weight, moment, work, power, energy, potential energy, and kinetic energy.

1.2

State Newton's three Laws of Motion

1.3

Identify examples of Newton's three Laws of Motion.

1.4

Define, compare, and contrast equilibrium and trimmed flight.

1.5

Define static pressure, air density, temperature, lapse rate, humidity, viscosity, and local speed of sound.

1.6

State the relationship between humidity and air density.

1.7

State the relationship between temperature and viscosity.

1.8

State the relationship between temperature and local speed of sound.

1.9

State the pressure, temperature, lapse rate, and air density at sea level in the standard atmosphere using both Metric and English units of measurement.

1.10

State the relationships between altitude and temperature, pressure, air density, and local speed of sound within the standard atmosphere. 1.1-1

1.11

State the relationships between pressure, temperature, and air density using the General Gas law.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.1.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.1-2

INFORMATION SHEET Basic Properties of Physics Information Sheet No. 1.1.11 INTRODUCTION This lesson topic will introduce you to the basic physical laws that govern how an airplane flies. REFERENCES

1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapter 1

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1)

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION MATHEMATICAL SYSTEMS A scalar is a quantity that represents only magnitude, e.g., time, temperature, or volume. It is expressed using a single number, including any units. A vector is a quantity that represents magnitude and direction. It is commonly used to represent displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force. Displacement (s) is the distance and direction of a body's movement (an airplane flies east 100 nm). Velocity (V) is the speed and direction of a body's motion, the rate of change of position (an airplane flies south at 400 knots). Speed is a scalar equal to the magnitude of the velocity vector. Acceleration (a) is the rate and direction of a body's change of velocity (gravity accelerates bodies toward the center of the earth at 32.174 ftls 2). FORCE (F) is a push or pull exerted on a body (1,000 Ibs of thrust pushes a jet through the sky).

A vector is represented by an arrow. The length of the arrow represents the magnitude and the heading of the arrow represents the direction. Vectors may be added by placing the head of the first vector on the tail of the second and drawing a third vector from the tail of the first to the head of the second. This new vector (Figure 1.1-1) is the resulting magnitude and direction of the original two vectors working together.

Vectcr A FlgunJ 1.1-1 Vectors

1.1-3

B

An angle has three parts: An initial ray, a terminal ray, and a vertex (the point of intersection of the two rays) . We can identify an angle by either using a Greek letter, such as e , or by using the angle symbol (L) followed by a point on the angle's initial ray (C), its vertex (A), and a point on its terminal ray (8) i.e., LeAB. Since Figure 1.1-2 is a triangle, we can also define LABC and LBCA. A 90° angle is called a right angle(L). In Figure 1.1-2, LC is a right angle. The sum of the three angles in a triangle is always equal to 180°.

W I-

en

a ~

a..

o

A ~

__

~

________ b

~~ C

ADJACENT

Figure 1.1-2 Right Triangle

The sides of the triangle may be defined by their location with respect to the angle. The hypotenuse of triangle ABC is the side opposite the right angle. The adjacent side forms the ray between e and the right angle, while the opposite side does not form a ray from angle e. Trigonometric functions may be defined as ratios of the lengths of two sides of a right triangle. The functions that we will be most concerned with in this course are sine (sin), cosine (cos), and tangent (tan). They are defined by the equations below, and Table 1.1-1 gives approximate values for angles up to 90°. a4;.

sin 11= opp. =~ hyp. c

b c

sin

cos 11=-=-

hyp.

~

opp.

angle

sin

cos

tan

0°

0.00

1.00

0.00

15°

0.26

0.97

0.27

30°

0.50

0.87

0.58

45°

0.71

0.71

1.00

60°

0.87

0.50

1.73

75°

0.97

0.26

3.73

90°

1.00

0.00

co

Table 1.1-1 Trigonometric Functions 1.1-4

a

tan t I = - = - = cos ~ a4;. b

DEFINITIONS Mass (m) is the quantity of molecular material that comprises an object. Volume (v) is the amount of space occupied by an object. Density (p) is mass per unit volume. It is expressed:

mass

p=--volume Weight (W) is the force with which a mass is attracted toward the center of the earth by gravity. Force (F) is mass x acceleration.

M = F

x

d

Momont ..

r=oroe

5

d

Moment Arm

I

=

F ma

A moment (M) is created when a force is applied at some distance from a an axis or fulcrum, and tends to produce rotation about that point. A moment is a vector quantnv equal to a force (F) times the distance (d) from the point of rotation that is perpendicular to the force (Figure 1.1-3). This perpendicular distance is called the moment arm.

Flguro 1.1-3 Moment

Work (W) is done when a force acts on a body and moves it. It is a scalar quantity equal to the force (f) times the distance of displacement (s).

W=F·s Power (P) is the rate of doing work or work done per unit of time. Energy is a scalar measure of a body's capacity to do work. There are two types of energy: potential energy and kinetic energy. Energy cannot be created or destroyed, but may be transfonned from one form to another. This prinCiple is called conservation of energy. The equation for total energy is:

T.E. = K.E. + P.E.

1.1-5

Potential energy (P.E.) is the ability of a body to do work because of its position or state of being . It is a function of mass (m), gravity (g), and height (h).

P E. = weightx height= m g h Kinetic energy (K.E.) is the ability of a body to do work because of its motion. It is a function of mass (m) and velocity M.

K.E. = !...mv z 2 Work may be performed on a body to change its position and give it potential energy or work may give the body motion so that it has kinetic energy. Under ideal conditions, potential energy may be completely converted to kinetic energy, and vice versa. The kinetic energy of a glider in forward flight is converted into potential energy in a climb. As the glider's velocity (K.E.) diminishes, its altitude (P.E.) increases. NEWfON'S LAWS OF MOTION

NEWTON'S FIRST LAW - THE LAW OF EQUILIBRIUM "A body at rest tends to remain at rest and a body in motion tends to remain in motion in a straight line at a constant velocity unless acted upon by some unbalanced force." The tendency of a body to remain in its condition of rest or motion is called inertia. Equilibrium is the absence of acceleration, either linear or angular. Equilibrium exists when the sum of all the forces and the sum of all the moments around the center of gravity are equal to zero. An airplane in straight and level flight at a constant velocity is acted upon by four forces: thrust, drag, lift and weight. When thrust is equal to drag, and lift is equal to weight, the airplane is in equilibrium (Figure 1.1-4).

.........LCt:...---. ,"--T! ";;;. ~

---............IMW-~~l

./ rt • • • • :""'I

ow 17·· 'f::a 7' .,,. +

1Figure 1.1-4 Equilibrium Flight

Trimmed flight exists when the sum of the moments around the center of gravity is zero. In trimmed flight, the sum of the forces may not be equal to zero since you can trim an airplane into a turn . If you are in equilibrium flight. then you are in trimmed flight. but the reverse is not necessarily true.

1.1-6

~

I

I I I

lHRUST

LIFT

::~ ~ f~::, .;" .1, .

~

". .: .. ,~"''' ,i ....

- - - - - - - -'-:

T + (0 - W Bin }

.....

,r'.......

J I

=0

."...

.

.",..:-~ - ; rL.. _:___-----·

""',)'. • ...~.... ... " : 'o ll*-": • ~,.;..:

". ". '

DRAG

J

~

I

J I

EIG HT

An airplane does not have to be in straight and level flight to be in equilibrium. Figure 1.1-5 shows an airplane that is climbing, but not accelerating or decelerating, i.e., there are no unbalanced forces. It is another example of equilibrium flight. Thrust must overcome drag plus the parallel component of weight. Lift must overcome the perpendicular component of weight.

Figure 1.1-5 Equilibrium in Climbing Flight

Thrust

An airplane that is able to generate sufficient thrust to climb vertically (90 0 to the horizon) at a constant true airspeed can stabilize at an equilibrium flight condition. Thrust must equal weight plus total drag, and lift must be zero (Figure 1.1-6).

t

T+W+O= O L 0

=

Weight + Drag Figure 1.1-6 Equilibrium in Vertical Flight NEWTON'S SECOND LAW - THE LAW OF ACCELERATION

"An unbalanced force (F) acting on a body produces an acceleration (a) in the direction of the force that is directly proportional to the force and inversely proportional to the mass (m) of the body." In equation form:

F

Vour -VIN

m

time

a=- or a = - - - - -

1.1-7

When an airplane's thrust is greater than its drag (in level flight), the excess thrust will accelerate the airplane until drag increases to equal thrust. NEWTON'S THIRD LAW - THE LAW OF INTERACTION "For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction." This law is demonstrated by the thrust produced in a jet engine. The hot gases exhausted rearward produce a thrust force acting forward (Figure 1.1-7).

THRUST

HOT GASES

Figure 1 .1-7 Action and Reaction

PROPERTIES OF THE ATMOSPHERE The atmosphere is composed of approximately 78% nitrogen, 21% oxygen, and 1% other gases, which includes argon and carbon dioxide. Air is considered to be a uniform mixture of these gases, so we will examine its characteristics as a whole rather than as separate gases.

Static pressure (Ps) is the pressure each air particle exerts on another. Ambient static pressure is equal to the weight of a column of air over a given area. The force of static pressure acts perpendicular to any surface that the air particles collide with. As you increase altitude , less air is above you , so the weight of that air is decreased. Thus atmospheric static pressure decreases with an increase in altitude at a rate of approximately 1.0 in-Hg per 1000 ..,-----:::» 211,000 FT ft. p ·0.001085

Air density (p ) is the total mass of air particles per unit of volume. The distance between individual air particles increases with altitude resulting in fewer particles per unit volume. Therefore, air density decreases with an increase in altitude (Figure 1.1-8).

P • 0.0012111 P .0.001418 P • 0.0017115 P .0.002041

2O,COO FT

111,000 FT 10,000 FT 11.000 fT SEA LEVEL

P .0.002378

Figure 1.1-8 Air Density Temperature (T) is a measure of the average kinetic energy of the air particles. Air temperature decreases linearly with an increase in altitude at a rate of 2 °C (3.57 OF ) per 1000 ft until 36,000 feet. This is called the average lapse rate. From 36,000 feet 1.1-8

through approximately 80,000 feet, the air remains at a constant -56.5 °C (-69.7 OF). This layer of constant temperature is called the isothermal layer. Humidity is the amount of water vapor in the air. As humidity increases, water molecules displace an equal number of air molecules. Since water molecules have less mass and approximately the same volume, density decreases. Therefore, as humidity increases. air density decreases. Viscosity (Il ) is a measure of the airs resistance to flow and shearing . Air viscosity can be demonstrated by its tendency to stick to a surface. For liquids, as temperature increases, viscosity decreases. Recall that the oil in your car gets thinner when the engine gets hot. Just the opposite happens with air: Air viscosity increases with an increase in temperature. Sound is caused by disturbances of the air e.g., an explosion causes a sound because it compresses the air immediately around it. This creates a series of alternating compressions and rarefactions which is transmitted to our ears as sound. The compressions and rarefactions are transmitted from one particle to another, however the particles are not flowing from one point to another. Sound is wave motion. not particle motion. The local speed of sound is the rate at which sound waves travel through a particular air mass. The speed of sound, in air, is dependent only on the temperature of the air. The warmer the air, the more excited the particles are in that air mass. The more excited the molecules are; the more easily adjacent molecules can propagate the sound wave. As the temperature of the air increases. the speed of sound increases.

THE STANDARD ATMOSPHERE The atmospheric layer in which most flying is done is an ever-changing environment. Temperature and pressure vary with altitude, season, location, time, and even solar sunspot activity. It is impractical to take all of these into consideration when discussing airplane performance. In order to disregard these atmospheric changes, an engineering baseline has been developed called the standard atmosphere. It is a set of reference conditions giving average values of air properties as a function of altitude. A list of some of these propert ies may be found in Appendix C . Unless otherwise stated. any discussion of atmospheric properties in this course will assume standard atmospheric conditions.

1.1-9

SEA LEVEL STANDARD ATMOSPHERIC CONDITtONS

Static Pressure PSD Temperature

To

Average Lapse Rate

Air Density Po Local Speed 01 Sound LSOSc

ENGLISH

METRIC

29.92 in-Hg

1013.2 mb

59 OF

15°C

3.57 of I 1000 tt

.2..0 °C I 1000 ft

0.002378 slugs I ft3

1 .2255 grams I lI\er

661.7 kts

340.4 m I s

Table 1.1-2 Sea Level Standard Atmospheric Conditions

TH E GENERAL GAS LAW The General Gas Law demonstrates the relationship between three properties of air: pressure (P), density (p ), and temperature (T). It is expressed as an equation where R is the Universal Gas Constant:

P=pRT One method to increase pressure is to k.eep density constant and increase temperature (as in a pressure cooker). If pressure remains constant, there is an inverse relationship between density and temperature. An increase in temperature must result in a decrease in density, and vice versa. These relationships are demonstrated below:

ALTITUDE MEASUREMENT Altitude is defined as the height above a given plane of reference. True altitude is the actual height above mean sea level. Pressure altitude (PA) is the height above the standard datum plane. The standard datum plane is the actual elevation at which the barometric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg. Since the standard datum plane is at sea level in the standard day, true altitude will be equal to pressure altitude. Density altitude (OA) is the altitude in the standard atmosphere where the air density is equal to local air density. It is found by correcting pressure altitude for temperature deviations from the standard atmosphere. On a standard day, density altitude is equal to pressure altitude. But, as temperature increases.the air becomes

1.1-10

less dense, with the effect that the actual air density at one altitude is equal to that of a higher altitude on a standard day. A high DA indicates a low air density, and vice versa. Density altitude is not a height reference; rather, it is an index to aircraft performance. A high DA will decrease the power produced by the engine because the engine is getting fewer air molecules to burn. It also reduces the thrust produced by the propeller or jet engine because they are accelerating fewer air molecules. The reduced power and thrust will reduce an airplane's acceleration and climb performance. A high DA also requires a higher true airspeed for takeoff and landing, and therefore, will increase takeoff and landing distance. Figure 1.1-9 is a diagram that may be used to compute density altitude.

-

_ .'

-

1---1--

-1- - " ' -- - --~--+

_ . - i - ---t---il--..~~

40

, I , I .4lJ

.3() !

I

!

.

-20

I , I ! I .20

·10 0 10 TEMPEi\A1\JFIE "C I

20

30

I ! I, ! ! I ! ! , ! , ! , !

0 lID 40 TlMN!AA1\JRI! "P

110

80

I

oW

I • I

I t!

100

60

I '20

Figure 1.1-9 Density Altitude Computation Chart

In the example above, we demonstrate the effects of several atmospheric properties through the warming period of a day. You can see that the static pressure and pressure altitude remain virtually constant throughout the day. However, as the sun heats the air, the reduced density causes a dramatic increase in density altitude. This will have a noticeable impact on aircraft performance.

1.1-11

STUDY QUESTIONS

Basic Properties of Physics

1. How does a vector quantity differ from a scalar quantity?

2. Define mass.

3. Define weight.

4. Define air density.

5. How are a force and a moment related?

6. Define work. How is it calculated?

1.1-12

·

7. Define power.

8. Define energy. What is the equation for total energy?

9. Define potential energy (P.E.).

10. Define kinetic energy (K.E.).

11. State Newton's First Law of Motion.

12. Under what conditions can both an airplane traveling at a constant speed and direction and an airplane parked on the flight line be in equilibrium?

13. What is the difference between trimmed flight and equilibrium flight?

1.1-13

14. State Newton's Second Law of Motion and provide an example.

15. State Newton's Third Law of Motion and provide an example.

16. Define static pressure. What change in atmospheric static pressure (P s) occurs with an increase in altitude (sea level to 80,000 ft.)?

17. What change in air density occurs with an increase in altitude (sea level to 80,000 ft.)?

18. Define air temperature.

19. What change in air temperature occurs in the standard atmosphere from sea level through 80,000 feet?

1.1-14

20. What

c~ange

in air density occurs with an increase in humidity?

21 . Define air viscosity. What change in air viscosity occurs with an increase in temperature?

22. What is the primary factor affecting the speed of sound in air?

23. What are the sea level conditions in the standard atmosphere?

24. State the General Gas Law. What is the relationship between temperature, pressure, and density according to the General Gas Law?

1.1-15

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.1-16

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Aircraft Terminology Assignment Sheet No. 1.2.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to introduce the student to basic aircraft terminology, and to describe the physical characteristics of the T-34C and T-37B. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely" supported by this lesson topic: 1.12

Define, compare, and contrast an aircraft and an airplane.

1.13

List and describe the three major control surfaces of an airplane.

1.14

List and define the five major components of an airplane.

1.15

List "and define the components of the airplane reference system.

1.16

Describe the orientation between the components of the airplane reference system.

1.17

List and define the motions that occur around the airplane center of gravity.

1.18

Define wingspan, chordline, chord, tip chord, root chord, average chord, wing area, taper, taper ratio, sweep angle, aspect ratio, wing loading, angle of incidence, and dihedral angle.

1.19

Describe and state the advantages. of the semi-monocoque fuselage construction.

1.20

Describe full cantilever wing construction. 1.2-1

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.2.1 I and answer the Study Questions.

1.2-2

INFORMATION SHEET Aircraft Terminology Information Sheet No. 1.2.11 INTRODUCTION This lesson defines basic terms used to describe major components of conventional fixed-wing aircraft. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION

MAJOR COMPONENTS OF AN AIRPLANE An aircraft is any device used or intended to be used for flight in the air. It is normally supported either by the buoyancy of the structure (balloon, dirigible) or by the dynamic reaction of the air against i~s surfaces (airplane, glider, helicopter). An airplane is a heavier-than-air fixed-wing aircraft that is driven by an engine driven propeller or a gas turbine jet and is supported by the dynamic reaction of airflow over its wings. The T-34C and the T-37B are unpressurized low-winged monoplanes with a tricycle landing gear. The T -34 is a single engine turboprop with tandem cockpits while the T-37 is a twin engine turbojet with side-by-side seating. They will be the primary examples of conventional airplanes used throughout this course. A conventional airplane consists of a fuselage, wing, empennage, landing g.ear, and engine(s). The fuselage is the basic structure of the airplane to which all other components are attached. It is designed to hold passengers, cargo, etc. Three basic fuselage types are possible: Truss, full monocoque, and semi-monocoque. The truss type consists of a metal or wooden frame over which a light skin is stretched. It is very strong and easily repaired, but quite heavy. Full monocoque is extremely light and strong because it consists of only a skin shell which is highly stressed but almost impossible to repair if damaged . Sem;-monocoque is a modified version of monocoque having skin. transverse frame members. and stringers , which all share in stress loads and may be readily repaired if damaged. The T-37 and T-34 both use semi-monocogue fuselages (Figure 1.2-1 and 1.2-2). 1.2-3

Figure 1.2-1 T-34C Cut-away The wing is an airfoil attached to the fuselage and is designed to produce lift. It may contain fuel cells, engine nacelles, and landing gear. Ailerons (and spoilers) are control surfaces attached to the wing to control roll. Flaps. (and slots) are high lift devices attached to the wing to increase lift at low airspeeds. The T-37 and T-34 both have single low-mounted wings with slotted flaps integrated into the trailing edge inboard of the ailerons. Since all bracing is internal, the wings are called full cantilever. The empennage is the assembly of stabiliZing and control surfaces on the tail of an airplane. It provides the greatest stabilizing influence of all the components of the conventional airplane. The empennage consists of the aft part of the fuselage, the vertical stabilizer, and the horizontal stabilizer. The rudder is the upright control surface attached to the vertical stabilizer to control yaw. Elevators are the horizontal control surfaces attached to the horizontal stabilizer to control pitch. The landing gear permits ground taxi operation and absorbs the shock encountered during takeoff and landing. The T-34 and T-37 have tricycle landing gears that include a nosewheel and two main wheels. During taxi operations, the T -37 uses a steerable nosewheel for control, while the T-34 is steered using its rudder.

1.2-4

The engine provides the thrust necessary for powered flight. Military and commercial airplanes may be fitted with multiple turboprop, turbojet, or turbofan engines. The type of engine depends on the mission requirements of the aircraft. The T-34C has a PT6A-25 turboprop engine and the T-37B has two J69-T-25A turbojet engines.

VERllCALSTABfUZER

IMP!HNAOE

FIgUre 1.2-2 Airplane Components AIRPLANE REFERENCE SYSTEM An airplane's reference system consists of three mutually perpendicular lines (axes) intersecting at a point (Figure 1.2-3). This point, called the center of gravity (C.G.) is the point at which all weight is considered to be concentrated, and about which all forces and moments (yaw, pitch and roll) are measured. Theoretically, the airplane will balance if suspended at the center of gravity. As fuel bums, bombs/missiles are expended, or cargo shifts, the C.G. will move. The longitudinal axis passes from the nose to the tail of the airplane. Movement of the lateral axis around the longitudinal axis is called roll, or lateral control. The lateral axis passes from wingtip to wingtip. Movement of the longitudinal axis around the lateral axis is called pitch, or longitudinal control. The vertical axis passes vertically through the center of gravity. Movement of the longitudinal axis around the vertical axis is called yaw, or directional control. As an airplane moves through the air, the axis system also moves. Therefore, the movement of the airplane can be described by the movement of its center of gravity.

1.2-5

LATERAL AXIS

LONGITUDINAL AXIS

VERTICAL AXIS

CENTER OF GRAVITY

ROLLING MOMENT YAWING MOMENT Figure 1.2-3 Reference System DIMENSIONS Wingspan (b) is the length of a wing, measured from wingtip to wingtip. It always refers to the entire wing, not just the wing on one side of the fuselage. The wingspan of the T-34C is 33'5". The wingspan of the T-37B is 33'10". Chordline is an infinitely long, straight line drawn through the leading and trailing edges of an airfoil. Chord is a measure of the width of the wing or other control surface. It is measured along the chordline and is the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the airfoil. The chord may vary in length from the wingtip to the wing root. The root chord (c R) is the chord at the wing centerline and the tip chord (cT) is measured at the wingtip. Average chord (c) is the average of every chord from the wing root to the wingtip (Figure 1.2-4).

1.2-6

Trailing Edge

hordline 1414----ChOrd

Figure 1.2-4 Wing Section View

Wing area (S) is the apparent surface area of a wing from wingtip to wingtip. More precisely, it is the area within the outline of a wing on the plane of its chord, including that area within the fuselage, hull or nacelles. The formula for Sis:

S =b·c Taper is the reduction in the chord of an airfoil from root to tip. The wings of the T-34 and T-37 are tapered to reduce weight. improve structural stiffness. and reduce wingtip vortices. Assuming the wing to have straight leading and trailing edges, taper ratio (J..) is the ratio of the tip chord to the root chord (Figure 1.2-5).

Sweep angle (A) is the angle between a line drawn 25% aft of the leading edge, and a line parallel to the lateral axis.

r--

~I

b

I (. .. ___

5_ _ _...",)

T CR

---

...................

-- -- -- -- ... C

...L.

T

-r

Figure 1.2-5 Wing Planform Views

Aspect ratio (AR) is the ratio of the wingspan to the average chord. An aircraft with a high aspect ratio (35:1), such as a glider, would have a long, slender wing. A low aspect ratio (3: 1) indicates a short, stubby wing, such as on a high performance jet.

AR = hie 1.2-7

Wing loading (WL) is a ratio of an airplane's weight to the surface area of its wings. There tends to be an inverse relationship between aspect ratio and wing loading. Gliders have high aspect ratios and low wing loading. Fighters with low aspect ratios maneuver at high g-Ioads and are designed with high wing loading. The wing loading formula is:

WL = aircraft weight . wzng area Angle of incid ence is the angle between the airplane's longitudinal axis and the chordline of its wing. Dihedral angle is the angle between the spanwise inclination of the wing and the lateral axis. More simply, it is the upward slope of the wing when viewed from head on. A negative dihedral angle .is called an anhedral angle (sometimes cathedral). The T-34 and T-37 both have dihedral wings to improve lateral stability (Figure 1.2-6).

ANGLE OF INCIDENCE

DIHEDRAL ANGLE

Figure 1.2-6 Angle of Incidence and Dihedral Angle

1.2-8

STUDY QUESTIONS

Aircraft Terminology

1.

Define airplane.

2.

What type of construction is used in the fuselage of the T-34 or T-37?

3.

A wing without any external bracing is a ________ design wing.

4.

What control surfaces are attached to the wing?

5.

What control surfaces are attached to the empennage?

6.

What control surface is used for longitudinal control?

7.

What is the primary source of directional control?

"8.

Define airplane center of gravity.

1.2-9

9.

List the three airplane axes and the motions that occur about each.

10.

Define wingspan.

11.

What is the difference between chordline, chord, tip chord, root chord and average chord?

12.

Define wing area, and state the formula for calculating it.

13.

Define taper, taper ratio, and sweep angle.

14.

What is aspect ratio? What type of aspect ratio would you expect to find on a 852 bomber? A High performance fighter?

15.

Define angle of incidence. Can the angle of incidence ordinarily be changed?

16.

Define wing loading and state the formula for calculating it.

1.2-10

· 17.

Define dihedral angle.

1.2-11

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.2-12

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Basic Aerodynamic Principles Assignment Sheet No. 1.3.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding the basic principles of airflow as they relate to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.21

Define steady airflow, streamline, and streamtube.

1.22

Describe the relationship between airflow velocity and cross-sectional area within a streamtube using the continuity equation.

1.23

Describe the relationship between total pressure, static pressure, and dynamic pressure within a streamtube using Bernoulli's equation.

1.24

List the components of the pitot-static system.

1.25

State the type of pressure sensed by each component of the pitot-static system.

1.26

Define indicated airspeed, calibrated airspeed, equivalent airspeed, true airspeed, and ground speed .

1.27

State the corrections between indicated airspeed, calibrated airspeed, equivalent airspeed, true airspeed, and ground speed.

1.28

Describe the relationships between indicated airspeed , true airspeed, ground speed, and altitude.

1.3-1

1.29

Describe the effects of wind on indicated airspeed, true airspeed, and ground speed.

1.30

Given true airspeed, winds, and time, determine ground speed and distance traveled.

1.31

Define Mach number and critical Mach number.

1.32

Describe the effect of altitude on Mach number and critical Mach number.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.3.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.3-2

INFORMATION SHEET Basic Aerodynamic Principles Information Sheet No. 1.3.11 INTRODUCTION Before we discuss the forces of lift and drag, we need to have an understanding of how air particles and groups of air particles behave. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapter 2, Chapter 20 (Pages 147-148)

3.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION

PROPERTIES OF AIRFLOW The atmosphere is a uniform mixture of gases with the properties of a fluid, therefore, it is subject to the laws of fluid motion. Fluids can flow and may be of a liquid or gaseous state. They yield easily to changes in static pr~§s u re . density. temperature. and velocity. Steady airflow exists if at every point in the airflow these four properties remain constant over time. The speed and/or direction of the individual air particles may vary from one point to another in the flow, but the velocity of every particle that passes point 1 is always the same. In steady airflow, a particle of air follows the same path as the preceding particle. A streamline is the path that air particles follow in steady airflow (Figure 1.3-1). In steady airflow, particles do not cross streamlines.

Figure 1.3-1 Streamline in Steady Airflow

1.3-3

A collection of many streamlines forms a streamtube, which contains a flow just as effectively as a tube with solid walls (Figure 1.32). The streamtube is a closed system, therefore total mass and total energy must remain constant. If mass is added to the streamtube, an equal amount of mass will be removed. This would be similar to adding a gallon of water to a full bucket; a gallon of water will spill out. Energy cannot be added or removed; it can merely be transformed from one form to another.

A,V,;@ b

Figure 1.3-2 Streamtube

a THE CONTINUITY EqUATION Let us intersect the streamtube with two planes, perpendicular to the airflow at-points a-b b and c-d, with cross-sectional areas of A1 and A2 , respectively (Figure 1.3-3). The amount of Figure 1.3-3 Continuity of Flow mass passing any point in the streamtube may be found by multiplying area by velocity to give volume/unit time and then multiplying by density to give mass/unit time. This is called mass flow and is expressed:

Mass Flow = pA V The amount of mass flowing through A1 must equal that flowing through A2 , since no mass can flow through the walls of the streamtube. Thus, an equation expressing the continuity of flow through ·a streamtube is:

Our discussion is limited to subsonic airflow, therefore we can ignore changes in density due to compressibility. If we assume that both ends of the streamtube are at the same altitude, then P1 is equal to P2 and we can cancel them from our equation. The simplified continuity equation below is the one that we will use.

AJV;

=A2~

If the cross sectional area decreases on one side of the equation, the velocity must increase on the same side so both sides remain equal. Thus, velocity and area in a streamtube are inversely related.

1.3-4

BERNOULLI'S EQUATION Aerodynamics is concerned with the forces acting on a body due to airflow. These forces are the result of pressure and friction. The relationship between pressure and velocity is fundamental to understanding how we create this aerodynamic force on our wing. Bernoulli's equation gives the relationship between the pressure and velocity of steady airflow. Recall that in a closed system, total energy is the sum of potential energy and kinetic energy, and must remain constant. Compressed air has potential energ y because it can do work by exerting a force on a surface. Therefore, static pressure (Ps ) is a measure of potential energy per unit volume. Moving air has kinetic energy since it can do work by exerting a force on a surface due to its momentum. Dividing K.E. by volume and substituting p for mass/volume, gives us dynamic pressure. Dynamic pressure (q ) is the pressure of a fluid resulting from its motion and is equal to 1/2pV'- (Table 3.1-1)".

T.E. = P.E. + K.E.

.

T.E. = ' P.E. + K.E. volume volume volume T.E. = P s volume

+! m V'volume

T.E. = Ps + ~ p volume

V'-

I

Total pressure (PT), also called head pressure (H T), is the sum of static and dynamiC pressure. Table 3.1-1 Converting Energy to Pressure

As with total energy, total pressure also remains constant within a closed system. As area in a streamtube decreases, velocity increases, therefore, "q" must increase (recall that "q" contains V'-). From Bernoulli's equation we know that since q increases, Ps must decrease (Figure 1.3-4). In our streamtube, if dynamic pressure increases, static pressure decreases, and vice versa.

Figure 1 .3-4 Airfoil in a Streamtube

1.3-5

On a windless day, the pressure of the air around us is determined by this random molecular movement. It is static pressure. If we have a wind (bulk movement of molecules), there is also a pressure force resulting from the velocity of the air. A stop sign oriented directly into the wind feels this dynamic pressure on the side facing the air. Even though the static pressure still exists all around the sign, the dynamic pressure exists only on one side. Therefore, the front side feels both the static and dynamic pressures or a total pressure. AIRSPEED MEASUREMENT There are several reasons to measure airspeed. We need to know if we have sufficient dynamic pressure to create lift, but not enough to cause damage, and we need the airplane's velocity to navigate. Since dynamic pressure is a function of velocity, if we can measure it, we can calculate velocity. Dynamic pressure cannot be measured directly, but can be derived using Bernoulli's equation. By measuring total pressure and static pressure on the airplane, subtracting static pressure from total pressure results in dynamic pressure. The system that accomplishes this is called the

pitot-static system.

q=~-~ The pitot-static system consists of a pitot-tube and a static pressure source connected to a "black box" (Figure 1.3-5). The pitot-tube is the device that collects total pressure (PT1. The static pressure port is the device that collects ambient static pressure (P~.

-------~

•

PT __------------~

P'ITOT TUBE

BLACK BOX

STATIC PRESSURE PORT

Figure 1.3-5 Pitot-Static System

1.3-6

At the entrance to the pitot tube, the airstream has both an ambient static pressure (Ps) and a dynamic pressure (q). Inside the pitot-tube, the velocity of the air mass is reduced to zero. Since q = ! P \j2, as velocity reaches zero, dynamic pressure is converted to a static pressure. This converted static pressure is added to the ambient static pressure (P s) to form a total static pressure equal to the free airstream total pressure (Pr ). This total static pressure is connected to one side of a diaphragm inside the black box. The static pressure port is a series of small holes on the surface of the airplane's fuselage that are flush with the surface. Only the random motion of air molecules, or ambient static pressure (Ps ), affects this port (no dynamic pressure is collected). The static port is connected to the other side of the black box. The ambient static pressure (Ps) is subtracted from the total pressure (PT) with a diaphragm. Through a series of springs and levers, the remaining static pressure, which is equal to dynamic pressure (q), is displayed on a pressure gauge inside the cockpit. This gauge is calibrated in knots of indicated airspeed (KIAS). Indicated airspeed (lAS) is the instrument indication for the dynamic pressure the airplane is creating during flight. To find true airspeed, we must make a few corrections to lAS. Instrument error is caused by the static pressure port accumulating erroneous static pressure; slipstream flow causes disturbances at the static pressure port, preventing actual atmospheric pressure measurement. When indicated airspeed is corrected for instrument errori we call it calibrated airspeed (CAS). Often, installation and position error are combined with instrument error. Even the combination of all three errors is usually only a few knots, and is often ignored. Compressibility error is caused by the ram effect of air in the pitot tube resulting in higher than normal airspeed indications at airspeeds approaching the speed of sound. Equivalent airspeed (EAS) is the true airspeed at sea level on a standard day that produces the same dynamic pressure as the actual flight condition. It is found by correcting calibrated airspeed for compressibility error. Since we are primarily concerned with subsonic flight, we will ignore EAS in our calculations.

1/2p(TASY

= 1/2po (EAS)2

True airspeed (TAS) is the actual velocity at which an airplane moves though an air mass. It is found by correcting EAS for density. However, since the errors for compressibility and installation error both are very minor, we will ignore them, and develop TAS directly from lAS. TAS is lAS corrected for the difference between the local air density (p) and the density of the air at sea level on a standard day (Po)' The pitot static system is calibrated for standard sea level density, so TAS will equal lAS only under standard day. sea level conditions. Since air density decreases when you

1.3-7

increase temperature or altitude, if lAS remains constant while climbing from sea level to some higher altitude , TAS must increase. A rule of thumb is that TAS will be approximately three knots faster than lAS for every thousand feet of altitude increase.

TAS

= ~~

·lAS

"ICE-r' is a mnemonic device to help you remember the order of the airspeeds. Ground speed is a measure of the airplane's actual speed over the ground. Since TAS is the actual speed of the airplane through the air mass, if we correct TAS for the movement of the air mass (wind), we will have ground speed. It is calculated using the following formula:

GS=TAS-HEADWIND or GS=TAS+TAILWIND MACH NUMBER As an airplane flies, velocity and pressure changes create sound waves in the airflow around the airplane. Since these sound waves travel at the speed of sound, an airplane flying at subsonic airspeeds will travel slow~r than the sound waves and allow them to dissipate. However, as the airplane nears the speed of sound, these pressure waves pile up forming a wall of pressure called a shock wave, which also travels at the speed of sound. As long as the airflow velocity on our airplane remains below the local speed of sound (LSOS), our airplane will not suffer the effects of compressibility. Therefore it is appropriate to compare the two velocities. Mach Number (M) is the ratio of the airplane's true airspeed to the local speed of sound (Figure 1.3-6).

M= TAS LSOS

1.3-8

Figure 1.3·6 Mach Number

Since airplanes accelerate airflow to create lift, there will be local airflow that has a velocity greater than the TAS. Thus an airplane can experience compressibility effects at flight speeds below the speed of sound. Critical Mach number (MeRIT) is the free airstream Mach Number that produces the first evidence of local sonic flow. Simply put, an airplane exceeding MCRIT will have supersonic airflow somewhere on the airplane. Consider a positive camber airfoil at Mach 0.5. The maximum local airflow velocity on the surface is greater than the true airspeed speed but less than the speed of sound . If an increase to Mach 0.82 boosts the surface airflow velocity up to the local speed of sound, this would be the highest speed possible without supersonic airflow and would determine MCRIT (Table 1.3-2). CONSTANT lAS

CONSTANT TAS

lAS =TAS .~ p

TAS=IAS .~~

Po

=600

=200 KTS

lAS

= 200 KTS

lAS

TAS

=300 KTS

TAS

=300 KTS

TAS

MACH

LSOS

=700

=0.5

=200 KTS TAS =200 KTS MACH =0.29 lAS

SEA LEVEL

M=

lAS FL250 LSOS

CONSTANT MACH

MACH

=0.5

=300 KTS TAS =300 KTS lAS

MACH

=0.43

Table 1.3-2 Airspeed Comparison Chart

1.3-9

TAS LSOS

=500 KTS

=600 KTS MACH =1.0 lAS =700 KTS TAS =700 KTS MACH

=1.0

STUDY QUESTIONS Basic Aerodynamic Principles 1.

State the continuity equation. What are the variables in the equation? When may the density variable be cancelled?

2.

The continuity equation tells us that to double the velocity in an incompressible flow, the cross-sectional area must be _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3.

State Bernoulli's equation. Under what conditions does total pressure remain constant? If PT is constant, how do q and Ps relate?

4.

Describe how the Pitot-static system works using Bernoulli's equation.

5.

For a given altitude, what is true about the pressure in the static pressure port of the airspeed indicator?

6.

Define lAS and TAS. What is the equation relating the two?

7.

When will lAS equal TAS? How do lAS and TAS vary with increases in altitude?

1.3-10

· 8.

What must a pilot do to maintain a constant true airspeed during a climb?

9.

An airplane is flying at a six nautical mile per minute ground speed. If it has a 1DO-knot tailwind, what is its TAS?

10.

An F-14 is flying at an eight nautical mile per minute ground speed. If it has a TAS of 600 knots, does it have a headwind or tailwind and how much of one?

11.

Define Mach number and critical Mach Number (MeRIT).

12.

An F-117 is climbing at a constant 350 KIAS. What would be the effect on Mach Number as it climbs? Why?

1.3-11

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.3-12

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Lift and Stalls Assignment Sheet No. 1.4.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding lift and stalls as they relate to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.33

Define pitch attitude, flight path, relative wind, angle of attack, mean camber line, positive camber airfoil, negative camber airfoil, symmetric airfoil, aerodynamic center, airfoil thickness, spanwise flow, chordwise flow, aerodynamic force, lift and drag.

1.34

Describe the effects on dynamic pressure, static pressure, and the aerodynamic force as air flows around a cambered airfoil and a symmetric airfoil.

1.35

Describe the effects of changes in angle of attack on the pressure distribution and aerodynamic force of cambered and symmetric airfoils.

1.36

Describe the effects of changes in density, velocity, surface area, camber, and angle of attack on lift.

1.37

List the factors affecting lift that the pilot can directly control.

1.38

Compare and contrast the coefficients of lift generated by cambered and symmetric airfoils.

1.39

Describe the relationships between weight, lift, velocity, and angle of attack in order to maintain straight and level flight, using the lift equation.

1.40

Define boundary layer. 1.4-1

1.41

List and describe the types of boundary layer airflow.

1.42

State the advantages and disadvantages of each type of boundary layer airflow.

1.43

State the cause and effects of boundary layer separation.

1.44

Define stall and state the cause of a stall.

1.45

Define and state the importance of CLmax and CLmax AOA.

1.46

State the procedures for stall recovery.

1.47

List common methods of stall warning, and identify those used on the T34 or T-37.

1.48

State the stalling angle of attack of the T-34C.

1.49

Define stall speed.

1.50

Describe the effects of weight, altitude, and thrust on true and indicated stall speed, using the appropriate equation.

1.51

State the purpose of high lift devices.

1.52

State the effect of boundary layer control devices on the coefficient of lift, stalling AOA, and stall speed.

1.53

Describe different types of boundary layer control devices.

1.54

Describe the operation of boundary layer control devices.

1.55

State the effect of flaps on the coefficient of lift, stalling AOA, and stall speed.

1.56

Describe different types of flaps.

1.57

State the methods used by each type of flap to increase the coefficient of lift.

1.58

State the stall pattern exhibited by rectangular, elliptical, moderate taper, high taper, and swept wing planforms.

1.59

State the advantages and disadvantages of tapering the wings of the T-34 and T-37.

1.60

State the purpose of wing tailoring. 1.4-2

1.61

Describe different methods of wing tailoring.

1.62

State the types of wing tailoring used on the T-34 and T-37.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT

Review Information Sheet 1.4.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.4-3

INFORMATION f "iEET lift and Stall:; Information Sheet No. 1.4.11 INTRODUCTION lift must overcome the airplane's weight to achieve and maintain equilibrium flight. Understanding how lift is generated and the effect of each of its factors is essential for the prospective aviator. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapters 3, 4, and 5

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1), Section VI, Stalls, Figure 6-1

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

5.

AETCM 3-3, Vol 2, Chapter 5, Section A, 5.1 thru 5.2.3

INFORMATION

AIRFOIL TERMINOLOGY

Pitch attitude (e) is the angle between an airplane's longitudinal axis and the · horizon. Flight path is the path described by an airplane's center of gravity as it moves through an air mass. Relative wind is the airflow the airplane experiences as it moves through the air. It is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the flight path.

r

CHOROUNE

Figure 1 .4-1 Flight Path, Relative Wind, and Angle of Attack

Angle of attack (a.) is the angle between the relative wind and the chordline of an airfoil. Angle of attack is often abbreviated AOA. Flight path. relative wind. and angle of attack should never be interred from pitch attitude (Figure 1.4-1). 1.4-4

.....--- Lead'ng Edge

Nlmdmum Th'okness Aerodynamic Center Mean Camber Una

__

•••••••.•••••••••• _._..

Trailing Edge

.-._._................. _-.

J...--.-

..L~_----~

;..E------: Chord

--------~~~I

Figure 1 .4-2 Airfoil Terminology

The mean camber line is a line drawn halfway between the upper and lower surfaces. If the mean camber line is above the chordline, the airfoil has positive camber. If it is below the chord line, the airfoil has negative camber. If the mean camber line is coincident with the chord line, the airfoil is a symmetric airfoil (Figure 1.4-2). The aerodynamic center, or quarter chord point, is the point along the chord line where all changes in the aerodynamic force take place. On a subsonic airfoil, the aerodynamic center is located approximately one-quarter (between 23% and 27%) of the length of the chord from the leading edge. The aerodynamic center will remain essentially stationary unless the airflow.over the wings approaches the speed of sound. Discussion. of supersonic flight is not within the scope of this course. Airfoil thickness is the height of the airfoil profile. The point of maximum thickness corresponds to the aerodynamic center. Spanwise flow is airflow that travels along the span of the wing, parallel to the leading edge. Spanwise flow is normally from the root to the tip. This airflow is not accelerated over the wing and therefore produces no lift. Chordwise flow is air flowing at right angles to the leading edge of an airfoil. Since chordwise flow is the only flow that accelerates over a wing, it is the only airflow that produces lift.

1.4-5

THE AERODYNAMIC FORCE

UFT

t

RELAl1VE WINO

Figure 1.4-3 Aerodynamic Force

Aerodynamic force (AF) is a force that is the result of pressure and friction distribution over an airfoil, and can be resolved into two components, lift and drag. Lift (L) is the component of the aerodynamic force acting perpendicular to the relative wind. Drag (D) is the component of the aerodynamic force acting parallel to and in the same direction as the relative wind (Figure 1.4-3).

Airflow around a symmetric airfoil at zero angle of attack will have a streamline pattern similar to that in Figure 1.4-4. As the air strikes the leading edge of the airfoil, its velocity will slow to near zero, creating an area of high static pressure called the leading edge stagnation point. The-airflow then separates so that some air moves over the airfoil and some under it, creating two streamtubes. Airflow leaving the leading edge stagnation point will be accelerated due to the decrease in the area of each streamtube. The airflow on both surfaces will reach a maximum velocity at the point of maximum thickness. The airflow velocity then decreases until the trailing edge where the upper and lower airflow meet. At the trailing edge, the velocity slows to near zero velocity, forming another area of high static pressure called the trailing edge stagnation point. The increase in airflow velocity over an airfoil causes dynamic pressure to increase, which decreases static pressure. These changes in pressure, along with friction, are responsible for the aerodynamic force on an airfoil.

r

MaxJmum velocity. Lowest static pressure ....

"

,.

\

--'"

~

lq~~~:~ttt:;:~:t5:::::::::-:-:~' .-..

i' .. I I

\

L

Zero velOcity Total static pressu~

Figura 1.4-4 Airflow on

a Symmatric Airfoil

A symmetric airfoil at zero angle of attack produces identical velocity increases and static pressure decreases on both the upper and lower surfaces. Since there is no pressure differential perpendicular to the relative wind, the airfoil produces zero net lift.

1.4-6

Even at zero angle of attack, a symmetric airfoil still produces drag due to friction and a pressure differential parallel to the relative wind. The arrows in Figure 1.4-5 and Figure 1.4-6 indicate static pressure relative to ambient static pressure. Arrows pointing toward the airfoils indicate higher static pressure; arrows pointing away from the airfoils indicate lower static pressure.

Figure 1.4-6 Symmetric Airfoil at Positive Angle of Attack

Figure 1.4-5 Symmetric Alrfoll at Zero Angle of Attack

A cambered airfoil is able to produce an uneven pressure distribution even at zero AOA (Figure. 1.4-7). Because of the positive camber,~ the area in the streamtube above the wing is smaller than area in the streamtube below the wing; therefore the airflow velocity above the wing will be greater than the velocity below the wing. Maximum veIoclty, Lowest statIc pressure

L

--.l

Zero velocity Total 8tat1c pranurw

Figure 1.4·7 Airflow on a Positive Camber Airfoil

In figure 1.4-8, notice that the static pressure on both surfaces will be less than atmospheric pressure, and thus will produce a lifting force on both upper and lower surfaces. The important point is the difference in the pressures produced. The static pressure on the upper surface will be less than the static pressure on the lower surface, creating a pressure differential. The lower static pressure on the upper surface will pull the wing upward, creating a lifting force. 1.4-7

LOWER SURFAC1i IJFT

Figure

Figure 1.4-9 PosHlve Camber Airfoil at Positive Angle of Attack

1.~ Positive Camber Airfoil at Zero Angle of Attack

Figure 1.4-9 shows how increasing the angle of attack on any airfoil causes the area of the streamtube above the wing to decrease. This produces a greater velocity increase above the wing than below the wing. The greater velocity above the wing will create a pressure differential on a symmetric airfoil, and will increase the pressure differential on a cambered airfoil. The greater pressure differential on the airfoil will increase the magnitude of the aerodynamic foree. If pressure is applied to an area, a force is generated. The pressures acting on an airfoil are the result of the dynamic pressure the airfoil is experiencing. Experiments have shown that the aerodynamic force equation can be written as the product of dynamic pressure (q), the surface area of the airfoil (5), and a variable, F, called the coefficient of aerodynamic force. The coefficient represents the shape and orientation of the surface area within the relative wind.

e

Since lift and drag are the perpendicular and parallel components of aerodynamic force, they are functions of the same factors: Wing area, dynamic pressure and a coefficient. The equations for lift and drag are:

L = qSC D

= !i pV SC 2

L

L

= qSC =!ipV SC 2

D

1.4-8

D

There are eight factors that affect aerodynamic force, and thus lift. The first three are readily apparent: Density (p), velocity M, and surface area (S). The five remaining factors are all accounted for by the coefficient of lift. We have stated that both angle of attack (a) and shape affect the production of lift, so they will be the first two factors in the coefficient. The remaining three factors are not so easily discemable. They are: Aspect ratio (AR), viscosity (J.1) and compressibility. Looking at the lift equation, it should be obvious that when an airfoil is exposed to greater dynamic pressure (q), it encounters more air particles and thus produces more lift. Therefore, lift is dependent upon the density of the air (i.e., the altitude) and the velocity of the airflow. An increase in density or velocity will produce greater lift. Since lift is produced by pressure, which is force per unit area, it follows that a greater area produces a greater force. Therefore, an increase in wing surface area produces greater lift. The pilot has no control over the first three factors in the coefficient: aspect ratio, viscosity, and compressibility. Aspect ratio (AR) deals with the shape of the wing and will be briefly discussed later. Viscosity affects the aerodynamic force since it decreases the velocity of the airflow immediately adjacent to the wing's surface. Although we consider subsonic airflow to be incompressible, it does compress slightly when it encounters the wing. Since there is no way to control aspect ratio, viscosity, or compressibility, we will ignore them in our discussion unless specifically addressed. The coefficient of lift depends essentially on the shape of the airfoil and the AOA. Flaps are the devices used to change the camber of an airfoil. Flaps are used· primarily for takeoffs and landings. When employed, they will be lowered to a particular setting and remain there until your takeoff or landing is complete. This allows us to graph C l against AOA for each separate camber situation. AOA is the most important factor in the coeffi cient of lift, and the easiest for the pilot to change.

,.

c;;. iwt

.

\.I

~

~

'A

ri: 7

IS ,.. ~ 1.0 ~

~

/ 1

~A 44

/

0

/ ~

/1' I.~

V

rt ....,. .?r~

,/

~V A Y ~ IA ~ @i V ~~ ./ ;or

11.1 0.-

/'

./

V

v••

\c ~ ,

! Itll"I1"27311~

AHQU! OF ATTACK .

Figure 1.4-10 plots C l as it varies with AOA. These curves are for three different airfoils: One symmetric, one negative camber, and one positive camber. The shape of the C l curve is similar for most airfoils. At zero angle of attack, the positive camber airfoil has a positive C l , and the negative camber airfoil has a negative C l . The point where the curves cross the horizontal axis is the AOA where the airfoil produces no lift (C l = 0). At zero AOA the symmetric airfoil has C l = O. The positive camber airfoil must be at a negative AOA, and the

Figura 1.4-10 Cl vs ADA

1.4-9

negative camber airfoil must be at a positive AOA for the Cl to equal zero. As angle of attack increases, the coefficient of lift initially increases. In order to maintain level flight while increasing angle of attack, velocity must decrease. Otherwise, lift will be greater than weight, and the airplane will climb. Velocity and angle of attack are inversely related in level flight.

L=

li pV

2

~ SC t L

As angle of attack continues to increase, the coefficient of lift increases up to a maximum called C Lmax ' Any increase in angle of attack beyond C Lmax AOA causes a decrease in the coefficient of lift. Since this is the greatest coefficient of lift that can be produced, we call C Lmax AOA the most effective angle of attack. Note that as long as the shape of an airfoil remains constant, ~mat AOA will remain constant. regardless of weight. dynamic pressure. bank angle. etc.

Although lift is considered to be an upward force opposing weight, it can, and does, act in any direction. It is always perpendicular to the relative wind, not the horizon. In Figure 1.4-11, the relative wind and lift vectors are shown for an airfoil during a loop maneuver.. Note that the lift vector is always perpendicular to the relative wind.

Figure 1 .4-11 lift During a Loop

THE BOUNDARY LAYER

To this point, we have been dealing with frictionless flow. Common sense tells us that when air flows over a surface, friction develops. As the air flows over a flat plate, the air particles stick to the surface because of friction, and slow to near zero velOCity. There is also some viscosity between adjacent layers of air. Succeeding streamlines are slowed less, until eventually the outer streamline equals the free airstream velocity. The boundary layer is that layer of airflow over a surface that demonstrates local airflow retardation due to viscosity. It is usually no more than 1mm thick (the thickness of a playing card) at the leading edge of an airfoil, and grows in thickness as it moves aft over the surface. We have enlarged and illustrated the changes in the streamlines for clarity. The boundary layer has two types of airflow:

1.

In laminar flow, the air molecules move smoothly along in streamlines. The laminar layer produces very little friction, but is easily separated from the surface. It is represented by the smooth lines in Figure 1.4-12. 1.4-10

2. In turbulent flow, the streamlines break up and the flow is disorganized and irregular. The turbulent layer produces higher friction drag, but adheres to the upper surface of the airfoil, delaying boundary layer separation.

Figure 1.4-12 Boundary Layer Any object that moves through the air will develop a boundary layer that varies in thickness according to the type of surface. The type of flow in the boundary layer depends on its location on the surface. The boundary layer will be laminar only near the leading edge of the airfoil. As the air flows aft, the laminar layer begins oscillating and becomes turbulent. The turbulent layer will continue to increase in thickness as it flows aft. As air flows aft from the leading edge of the airfoil, it moves from a high-pressure area towards the low-pressure area at the point of maximum thickness. This favorable pressure gradient assists the boundary layer in adhering to the surface by maintaining its high kinetic energy. As the air flows aft from the point of maximum thickness (lower static pressure), toward the trailing edge (higher static pressure), it encounters an adverse pressure gradient. The adverse pressure gradient impedes the flow of the boundary layer. If the boundary layer does not have sufficient kinetic energy to overcome the adverse pressure gradient, the lower levels of the boundary layer will stagnate . The boundary laver will separate from the surface and cause the airfoil to lose the suction pressure that creates lift. Airflow behind the separation point will be forward, toward the leading edge. The decrease in CL beyond ClmIIx AOA is due to the separation of the boundary layer from the upper surface of the wing. An airfoil at a high angle of attack creates an adverse pressure gradient on the upper surface that is too strong for the kinetic energy in the boundary layer to overcome. Stall occurs when the boundary layer does not adhere to the surface near the I,eading edge. This occurs beyond CLmex AOA. Even at low angles of attack we have a small adverse pressure gradient behind the point of maximum thickness, but it is insignificant compared to the kinetic energy in the boundary layer until we approach ClmIx AOA.

1.4-11

Figure 1.4-13 shows the boundary layer attached at a normal AOA .. The point of separation will remain essentially stationary near the trailing edge of the wing, until AOA approaches Clmax AOA. The separation point then progresses forward as we increase AOA, eventually causing the airfoil to stall. At high angles of attack the airfoil is similar to a flat plate being forced through the air; the airflow simply cannot conform to the sharp turn. Note that the point where stall occurs is dependent upon AOA and not velocity.

--l5~£~ LOW ANGLE OF A1iACK

- -=C> EXCESSIVE ANGLE OF ATTACK

Figure 1 .4-13 Airflow Separation

STALLS

Figure 1.4-14 CL vs AOA

A stall is a condition of flight where an increase in AOA has resulted in a decrease in Cl . In Figure 1.4-14, we see that C l increases linearly over a large range of angles of attack then reaches a peak and begins to ·decrease. The highest point is CLmax ' and any increase in AOA beyond CLmaxAOA produces a decrease in Cl . Therefore, CLmaxAOA is known as the stalling angle of attack or critical angle of attack, and the region beyond CLmaxAOA is the stall region. It is important to remember that regardless of the flight . conditions or airspeed, the wing will always stall beyond the same AOA, C Lmax. The only cause of a -stall is excessive AOA. Stalls result in decreased lift, increased drag, and an altitude loss. They are particularly dangerous at low altitude or when allowed to develop into a spin. The only action necessary for stall recovery is to decrease the AOA below CLmaxAOA.

Numerous devices may give the pilot a warning of an approaching stall. They include AOA indicators, rudder pedal shakers, stick shakers, horns, buzzers, warning lights and electronic voices. Some of these devices receive their input from attitude gyros, accelerometers, or flight data computers, but most receive input from an AOA probe. The AOA probe is mounted on the fuselage or wing and has a transmitter vane that remains aligned with the relative wind. The vane transmits the angle of attack of the relative wind to a cockpit AOA indicator or is used to activate other stall warning

1.4-12

devices. Most USN and many USAF airplanes have standardized AOA indicators graduated in arbitrary units angle of attack, or graduated from zero to 100 percent. Stall warning in the T -37 is accomplished with aerodynamic stick shakers. The turbulent airflow caused by the separation of the boundary layer moves aft and hits the elevator causing it to shake and vibrate. This buffeting is the pilot's warning of an approaching stall. If the flaps are down, the turbulent airflow will pass beneath the elevator without causing buffeting. To correct this problem, small spoilers are located on the upper surface of the engine nacelles. This spoiler system works well except when the aircraft is configured and above approximately 90 KIAS. During these accelerated stall conditions, the spoilers don't extend. However, if the·speed brake is out, a light to moderate natural buffet is produced prior to the stall . Any further increase in angle of attack will cause the aircraft to abruptly stall. If the speed brake is not used and the flaps are extended 50 to 100 percent, there will be an approach to stall warning. However, the stall in the T-37 is gentle, with a light, easy to control rolling tendency. This stall is accompanied with a rapid onset of airframe buffeting occurring simultaneously with a stagnation of the nose. . The T-34C AOA indicator is calibrated so that the airplane stalls between 29.0 and 29.5 units angle of attack regardless of airspeed, nose attitude, weight, or altitude. The AOA system in the T-34 is self-adjusting to account for differences in full-flap or noflap stall angles. The T-34 also contains AOA indexer and rudder shakers that receive their input from an AOA probe on the left wing. The rudder pedal shakers are activated and airframe buffeting will occur at 26.5 units AOA. Stalls at idle in a clean configuration are characterized by a nose down pitch with a slight rolling tendency at near full aft stick. The effect of the landing gear on stalls is negligible, however extending the flaps will aggravate the stall characteristics by increasing the rolling tendency. Increased power will degrade the stall characteristics by increasing nose up stall attitude, increased buffeting and increased roll tendency. STALL SPEEDS As angle of attack increases, up to CLmax AOA, true airspeed decreases in level flight. Since CL decreases beyond CLmaxAOA, true airspeed cannot be decreased any further. Therefore the minimum airspeed required for level flight occurs at CLmaxAOA. Stall speed (Vs) is the minimum true airspeed required to maintain level flight at CLmax AOA. Although the stall speed may vary, the stalling AOA remains constant for a given airfoil. Since lift and weight are equal in equilibrium flight, we can substitute weight (yV) for lift (L) in the lift equation. By solving for velocity 01), we derive a basic equation for stall speed . By substituting the stall speed equation into the true airspeed equation and solving for indicated airspeed, we derive the equation for the indicated stall speed (lASs) . Weight, altitude, power, maneuvering, and configuration greatly affect an airplane's stall speed . Maneuvering will increase stall speed, but will not be discussed until the chapter on "Turning Flight". 1.4-13

2W

lASs =

2W

. As airplane weight decreases stall speed decreases, because the amount of lift required to maintain level flight decreases. When an airplane burns fuel in combat or drops ordnance, stall speeds decrease. Carrier pilots often dump fuel before shipboard landings in order to reduce their stall speed and the approach speed. Comparing two identical airplanes at different heights will demonstrate the effect of altitude on stall speed. The airplane at a higher altitude encounters air molecules that are further apart. In order to create sufficient dynamic pressure to produce the required lift, it must fly at a higher velocity (TAS). Therefore, an increase in altitude will increase stall speed. Since Po is constant, the indicated stall speed will not change as altitude changes. The stall speed discussed up to this point assumes that aircraft engines are at idle, and is called power-off stall speed. Power-on stall speed will be less than power-off stall speed because at high pitch attitudes. part of the weight of the airplane is actually being supported by the vertical component of the thrust vector (Figure 1.415). In addition, for propeller driven airplanes the portion of the wing immediately behind the propeller disc produces more lift because the air is being accelerated by the propeller. Power-on stall speed is approximately 9 knots less in the T-34, and 4 knots less in the T-37 than their respective power-off stall speeds.

V= s

2(W - Tsin fJ) pSC

2(W - T sin fJ)

lAS s =

POSC

LMAX

n

Air 8aJ!leraled over wing root by prop .::

','

:-:.:.

~

•

: ....

::::

•

a

':':-:.:':' ...:-:.!:::::

Figure 1.4-15 Power-On Stall

1.4-14

LMAX

HIGH LIFT DEVICES High lift devices also affect stall speeds since they increase C L as we approach C Lmax AOA. The primary purpose of high lift devices is to reduce takeoff and landing speeds by reducing stall speed. The increase in C L will allow a decrease in airspeed. For example, an airplane weighing 20,000 pounds flying at 250 knots develops 20,000 pounds of lift. As the airplane slows to 125 knots for landing, high lift devices can increase C L so that 20,000 pounds of lift can still be produced at the lower velocity. There are two common types of high lift devices, Those that delay boundary layer separation, and those that increase camber.

BOUNDARY LAYER CONTROL (BlC)

Figure 1.4-17 Automatic Slot

.....

.

, The maximum value of C L is limited by the AOA at which boundary layer separation occurs. If we could delay the separation as we increase AOA beyond the normal stalling AOA. we could increase C lmax ' Notice that both C Lmax and C Lma1l AOA increase with the use of BlC (Figure 1.4-16). BlC devices operate by allowing the high static pressure air beneath the wing to be accelerated through a ANGLE OF AlTACK nozzle and injected into the boundary layer on the upper surface of the airfoil. As the air is Figure 1.4·16 BlC accelerated through the nozzle, the potential energy is converted to kinetic energy. Using this extra kinetic energy, the turbulent boundary layer is able to overcome the adverse pressure gradient and adhere to the airfoil at higher AOAs. While there are many types of BlC devices, including blown BlC, suction BlC, and vortex generators, .our discussion will center on slots. There are generally two types of slots, fixed slots and automatic slots.

1

Fixed slots are gaps located at the leading edge of a wing that allow air to flow from below the wing to the upper surface. High pressure air from the leading edge stagnation point is directed through the slot. which acts as a nozzle converting the static pressure into dynamic pressure. The high Kinetic energy air 1eaving the nozzle increases the energy of the boundary layer and delays separation. Essentially, it blows the turbulent airflow backwards toward the trailing edge and delays separation. This is very efficient and causes only a small increase in drag. 1.4-15

Slats are moveable leading edge sections used to form automatic slots (Figure 1.4-17). When the slat deploys it opens a slot. Some slats are deployed aerodynamically by the chordwise circulation of airflow around the wing, and others are deployed mechanically, hydraulically or electrically. AerodynamiC deployment occurs when the dynamic pressure generated in flight decreases to the point that it is overcome by the chordwise circulation. Mechanical deployment usually occurs when the pilot or onboard computer lowers the flaps.

CAMBER CHANGE The most common method of increasing CLmax is by increasing the camber of the airfoil. There are various types of high lift devices that increase the camber of the wing and increase CLmax ' Trailing edge flaps are the most common type of high lift devices, but leading edge flaps are not unusual. The change in C L and AOA due to flaps is shown in Figure 1.4-18. Note the ANGLE OF AlTACK value of C L for this airfoil before and after flaps are deployed. Extending the flaps Figure 1.4--18 Camber Change increases the airfoil's positive camber thus shifting its zero lift point to the left. Note that the stalling AOA (C Lmax AOA) decreases. Although stalling AOA decreases, visibility on takeoff and landing improves due to flatter takeoff and landing attitudes made possible by these devices. Since boundary layer control devices increase stalling AOA, many modern day designs utilize BLC with camber change devices to maintain low pitch attitudes during approach and landing. Flaps also increase the drag on the airplane, enabling a steeper glide slope and higher power setting during approach without increasing the airspeed. This allows an airplane such as an A-4 or T-37B to carry more thrust throughout the landing phase and not significantly incre ase the approach speed (A higher throttle setting results in less spool-up time in case of a wave-off/go-around). For many airplanes, the first 50 percent of flap down movement produces most of the desired lift increase with less than half of the unwanted drag increase. Thus, raising flaps from 100 to 50 percent reduces drag significantly without a large loss of lift. This is especially important during engine failures on multi-engine airplanes. Figure 1.4-19 shows several common types of flaps.

1.4-16

A plain flap is a simple hinged portion of the trailing edge that is forced down into the airstream to increase the camber of the airfoil. A split flap is a plate deflected from the lower surface of the airfoil. This type of flap creates a lot of drag because of the turbulent air between the wing and deflected surface. A slotted flap is similar to the plain flap, but moves away from the wing to open a narrow slot between the flap and wing for boundary layer control. A slotted flap may cause a slight increase in wing area, but the increase is insignificant. The fowler flap is used extensively on larger airplanes. When extended, it moves down increasing the camber, and aft causing a significant increase in wing area as well as opening a slot for boundary layer control. Because of the larger area created on airfoils with fowler flaps, a large twisting moment is developed. This requires a structurally stronger wing to withstand the increased twisting load and precludes their use on high speed, thin wings. TRAILING EDGE FLAPS SPLIT FlAP

PLAIN FLAP

LEADING EDGE FLAPS PLAIN FLAP

SLOTTED FLAP

Figure 1.4-19 Types of Flaps

Leading edge flaps are devices that change the wing camber at the leading edge of the airfoil. They may be operated manually with a switch or automatically by computer. Leading edge plain flaps are similar to a trailing edge plain flap. Leading edge slotted flaps are similar to trailing edge slotted flaps, but are sometimes confused with automatic slots. Often the terms are interchangeable since many leading edge devices have some characteristics of both flaps and slats.

1.4-17

In order to determine the exact stall speed for various airplane conditions, consult the stall speed charts in your airplane's flight manual. The directions on how to use the stall speed chart are on the chart itself and are self-explanatory.

STALL PATTERN I WING DESIGN The most desirable stall pattern on a wing is one that begins at the root. The primary reason for a root first stall pattern is to maintain aileron effectiveness until the wing is fully stalled. Additionally, turbulent airflow from the wing root may buffet the empennage, providing an aerodynamic warning of impending stall. The following stall patterns are due to th e airfoil's planform (Figure 1.4-20). The lift distribution on the rectangular wing (/.. = 1.0) is due to low lift coefficients at the tip and high lift coefficients at the root. Since the area of the highest lift. coefficient will stall first, the rectangular wing has a strong root stall tendency. This pattern provides adequate stall warning and aileron effectiveness. This planform is limited to low speed, light-weight airplanes where simplicity of construction and favorable stall characteristics are the predominating requirements. RECTANGULAR WING

I~ I HIGH TAPeR WtNG

MODERATE TAPER WING

Figure 1.4-20 Stall Pattems

=

A highly tapered wing (/.. 0.25) is desirable from the standpoint of structural weight, stiffness, and wingtip vortices. Tapered wings produce most of the lift toward the tip, therefore, they have a strong tip stall tendency. Swept wings are used on high speed aircraft because they reduce drag and allow the airplane to fly at higher Mach numbers. They have a similar lift distribution to a tapered wing, and therefore stall easily and have a strong tip stall tendency. When the wingtip stalls, it rapidly progresses over the remainder of the wing. 1.4-18

The elliptical wing has an even distribution of lift from the root to the tip and produces minimum induced drag. An even lift distribution means that all sections stall at the same angle of attack. There is little advanced warning and aileron effectiveness may be lost near stall. It is also more difficult to manufacture than other planforms, but is considered the ideal subsonic wing due to its lift to drag ratio.

=

Moderate taper wings (A 0.5) have a lift distribution and stall pattern that is similar to the elliptical wing. The T-37 and T-34 use tapered wings because they reduce weight. improve stiffness. and reduce wingtip vortices. However, the even stall progression of tapered wings is undesirable because the ailerons are located near the tip. As a stall progresses, the pilot will lose lateral control of the airplane. Although stalls cannot be eliminated, they can be made more predictable by having the wing stall gradually. Since most airplanes do not have rectangular wings, they tend to stall with little or no warning. Wing tailoring techniques are used to create a root to tip stall progression and give the pilot some stall warning while ensuring that the ailerons remain effective up to a complete stall. Trailing edge flaps decrease the stalling angles of attack in their vicinity. causing initial stall in the flap area. Bl C devices generally delay stall in their vicinity. Propeller-driven aimlane_s may have a tip stall tendency during power-on stalls due to the increased airflow over the wing root. Geometric twist is a decrease in angle of incidence from wing root to wingtip. The root section is mounted at some angle to the longitudinal axis, and the leading edge of the remainder of the wing is gradually twisted downward. This results in a decreased angle of attack at the wingtip due to its lower angle of incidence. The root stalls first because of its higher AOA. The T-37 wing is geometrically twisted 2.5 0 and 1.4-21). the T -34C wing is geometrically twisted 3 .10 (F ROOT

+4.00 ~~ +0.90 GEOMETRIC

AERODYNAMIC TWIST

TWIST

Figure 1.4-21 Wing Twisting

Aerodynamic twist is a decrease in camber from wing root to wingtip. This causes a gradual change in cross section shape from positive camber at the wing root to a symmetric shape at the wingtip. Since positive camber airfoils stall at lower angles of attack, the wing root stalls before the wingtip. The T-37 and T-34 wings are aerodynamically twisted to create a reduced camber at the tip (Figure 1.4-22).

1.4-19

Figure 1.4-23 Stall Fences ANGLI! 011 ATTACK

Figure 1.4-22 Camber Decrease The spanwise flow on a swept wing is not accelerated over the wing, it does not contribute to the production of lift. Instead, it induces a strong tip stall tendency. Stall fences redirect the airflow along the chord, thereby delaying tip stall and enabling the wing to achieve higher AOAs without .stalling (Figure 1.4-23). A sharply angled piece of metal, called a atall strip, is mounted on the leading edge of the root section to induce a stall at the wing root. Since subsonic airflow cannot flow easily around sharp corners, it separates the boundary layer at higher angles of attack, ensuring that the root section stalls first. Stall strips are located near the root at the . leading edge of the T-34C wing (1.4-24).

"'STALL STRIP

Figure 1.4-24 Stall Strip

To produce the required lift at slow airspeeds, the pilot must fly at high angles of attack. Because flying slow at high angles of attack is one of the most critical phases of flight, you will practice recovering from several types of stalls during your training. The steps in a stall recovery involve simultaneously adding power, relaxing back stick pressure and rolling wings level (also called: max, relax, roll). The pilot adds power to help increase airspeed, allowing you to break any descent you may have due to the stall (especially if at low altitudes). This also helps you to get above stall velocity. The pilot must decrease the angle of attack to recover from a stalled condition. Remember, the only reason the aircraft has stalled is that it exceeded its stall angle of attack. The pilot's initial reaction, especially at low altitudes, might be to pull the nose up. However, the exact opposite must be done. The stick must be moved forward to decrease the angle of attack and allow the wing to provide sufficient lift to fly once again. By lowering the nose, angle of attack is decreased and the boundary layer separation point moves back toward the trailing edge. 1.4-20

The pilot rolls out of bank to wings level to help decrease the stall velocity and use all the lift to help break any descent you may have due to the stall (especially if at low altitudes).

1.4-21

STUDY QUESTIONS Lift and Stalls

1.

What is pitch attitude?

A.

The angle between the chordline and the tip path plane

B.

The angle between the chordline and the relative wind

C.

The angle between the longitudinal axis and the relative wind

D.

The angle between the longitudinal axis and the horizon.

2.

Define flight path.

3.

Define relative wind.

4.

How is angle of attack measured?

A.

Between the top surface of the airfoil and the chord line

B.

Between the relative wind and the bottom surface of the airfoil

C.

Between the relative wind and the chordline

D.

Between the mean camber line and the relative wind.

1.4-22

· 5.

Define mean camber line. How does the mean camber line define the type of airfoil?

6.

Define aerodynamic center.

7.

What is the effect on static pressure of increasing angle of attack on a symmetric airfoil?

8.

Define aerodynamic force, and state the aerodynamic force equation.

9.

What are the two component forces that make up the aerodynamic force?

10.

State the lift equation, and identify the three factors that the pilot can normally control.

1.4-23

11.

In order to maintain level flight while decreasing airspeed, what action must the pilot take?

12.

Draw the CL curves for both symmetric and a positively cambered airfoils and explain their differences.

13.

At what angle of attack is maximum lift produced?

14.

What is the orientation of the lift vector to the relative wind?

15.

An aircraft that has been flying straight-and-Ievel encounters the following changes. Match the changes with the effect on the aircraft.

A.

B. C. D. E.

Constant airspeed, increase oc below CLmax Decrease airspeed, constant oc Increase airspeed, decrease oc Increase airspeed, increase oc: beyond C Lmax Constant airspeed, decrease oc:

1.4-24

(1 ) (2) (3) (4)

maintain level flight increase lift & climb decrease lift & descent stall

16.

Describe laminar and turbulent flow.

17.

What is the primary feature of airflow separation? During boundary layer separation, the separation point moves along the airfoil.

18.

Define stall. What is the cause of stall?

19.

How does increasing the speed of an airfoil affect its stalling angle of attack?

A. B. C. D.

20.

Increases the stalling angle of attack Reduces the stalling angle of attack Has no effect on stalling angle of attack Eliminates the stalling angle of attack

In a stall, what is the result of increasing ADA?

A. B.

C. D.

Cl increases and lift decreases Cl increases and lift increases Cl decreases and lift increases CL decreases and lift decreases

1.4-25

21.

Define stall speed and state the normal stall speed equation.

22.

State the relationship of stall speed to gross weight and altitude.

23.

The vertical component of thrust supports a portion of gross weight during _ _ stall, reducing stall speed by approximately __ knots in the T-34 and _ _ knots in the T-37.

A. turning, 7, 9 B.poweron,9,4

C. accelerated, 9, 4 D. normal, 7, 4

24.

What is the purpose of high lift devices? What are the two types? How does each type affect stalling AOA?

25.

Name two types of BlC devices. In general, how do slots work?

1.4-26

26.

What effect does lowering the flaps have on lift and drag?

A.

8. C. D.

Increases lift and increases drag Decreases lift and decreses drag Increases lift without increasing drag Does not affect lift but increases drag

27.

List several high lift devices that increase the camber of an airfoil. Which will you find on the T-37 or T-34? Which produces the greatest increase in CLmax?

28.

Why-do we want the wing root to stall first?

29.

Define geometric and aerodynamic twist.

30.

How do you recover from a stall?

1.4-27

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.4-28

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Drag Assignment Sheet No. 1.5.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding drag as it relates to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.63

Define total drag, parasite drag, and induced drag.

1.64

List the three major types of parasite drag.

1.65

State the cause of each major type of parasite drag.

1.66

State the aircraft design features that reduce each major type of parasite drag.

1.67

Describe the effects of changes in density, velocity, and equivalent parasite area on parasite drag, using the parasite drag equation. -

1.68

Describe the effects of upwash and downwash on the lift generated by an infinite wing.

1.69

Describe the effects of upwash and downwash on the lift generated by a finite wing.

1.70

State the cause of induced drag.

1.71

State the aircraft design features that reduce induced drag.

1.72

Describe the effects of changes in lift, weight, density, and velocity on induced drag, using the induced drag equation. 1.5-1

1.73

Describe the effects of changes in velocity on total drag.

1.74

Define and state the purpose of the lift to drag ratio.

1.75

State the importance of UDMAX.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.5.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.5-2

INFORMATION SHEET Drag Information Sheet No. 1.5.11 INTRODUCTION Since thrust must overcome drag for equilibrium flight, drag will playa major roll when we discuss airplane performance. Understanding the causes and effects of drag is essential for the prospective aviator. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots Chapters 6 and 7

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1)

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

5.

AETCM3-3, Vol 2, Chapter 1, 1.10

INFORMATION DRAG

Drag is the component of the aerodynamic force that is parallel to the relative wind, and acts in the same direction. The drag equation is the same as the aerodynamic force equation, except that the coefficient of drag (CD) is used.

D =1/2pV 2 SCD Co may be plotted against angle of attack (Figure 1.5-1) for a given aircraft with a constant configuration. Note that the Co is low and nearly constant at very low angles of attack. As angle of attack increases, the Co rapidly increases and continues to increase. Since there is always some resistance to motion, drag will never be zero; therefore, Co will never be zero. Drag is divided into parasite drag and induced drag. By independently studying the factors that affect each type, we can better understand how they act when combined.

I I

II I

GIl

I

Ut

v

0."

V

an

,.....

,.,'

-

Cc..

,/

~

tt'·'.~""»1iI A~OPATTACK

Figure 1.5.. 1 Coefficient of Drag

1.5-3

PARASITE DRAG

Parasite drag (Dp) is defined as all drag that is not associated with the production of lift. It is composed of form drag, friction drag and interference drag. Form drag, also known as pressure or profile drag, is caused by the airflow separation from a surface (Figure 1.5-2) and the wake that is created by that separation. It is primarily dependent upon the shape of the object. In Figure 1.5-2, the flat plate has a leading edge stagnation point at the front that contains very high static pressure. There is also a low static pressure wake area behind the plate. This pressure differential pulls the plate backward and retards forward motion. Conversely, we see that streamlines flow smoothly over a smooth shape (Figures 1.5-3 and 1.5-4) and less form drag is developed. However, when that same airfoil is raised to some high angle of attack, it exposes a larger area to the relative wind and separation occurs. Form drag would temporarily be significant until the aircraft velocity decreased to match the higher angle of attack. To reduce form drag . the fuselage . bombs and other surfaces exposed to the airstream are streamlined (shaped like a teardrop). Streamlining reduces the size of the high static pressure leading edge stagnation point, and reduces the size of the low static pressure wake. Because of the decreased pressure differential, form drag is decreased.

"---------

-------------------------------------------~---------------

Figure 1.5-2

Figure 1.5-3

Figure 1.5-4

Flat Plate

Sphere

Streamlining

Due to viscosity. a retarding force called friction drag is created in the boundary layer. Turbulent flow creates more friction drag than laminar flow. Friction drag is usually small per square foot, but since the boundary layer covers the entire surface of the airplane, friction drag can become quite significant in larger airplanes. Rough surfaces increase the thickness of the boundary layer. causing more airflow to be affected by viscosity , creating greater skin friction . Friction drag can be reduced by smoothing the exposed surfaces of the airplane through painting, cleaning. waxing or polishing. Since irregularities of the wing's surface cause the boundary layer to become turbulent, using flush rivets on the leading edges also reduces friction.

1.5-4

Since friction drag is much greater in the turbulent boundary layer, it might appear that preventing the laminar flow from becoming turbulent would decrease drag. However, if the boundary layer were all laminar airflow, it would easily separate from the surface, creating a large wake behind the airfoil and increasing form drag. Since turbulent airflow adheres to the surface better than laminar flow, maintaining turbulent airflow on an airfoil will significantly reduce form drag with only a small increase in friction. This is why a golf ball with dimples will go farther than a smooth ball, it as less form drag (Figure 1.5-5).

Figure 1.5-5 Dimples on a Golf Ball Interference drag is generated by the mixing of streamlines between one or more components. An example is the air flowing around the fuselage mixing with air flowing around an external fuel tank. We know the drag of the fuselage and the drag of the fuel tank individually. The total drag after we attach the fuel tank will be greater than the sum of the fuselage and the fuel tank separately. Roughly 5 to 10 percent of the total drag on an airplane can be attributed to interference drag. Interference drag can be minimized by proper fairing and filleting , which allows the streamlines to meet gradually rather than abruptly .. Total parasite drag (Op) can be found by multiplying dynamic pressure by an area. Equivalent parasite area (f) is a mathematically computed value equal to the area of a flat plate perpendicular to the relative wind that would produce the same amount of drag as form drag, friction drag and interference drag combined . is not the cross-sectional area of the airplane. The equation for Dp is:

~

IS

't

D,

YEL(Jcn'Y (1'A$)

= }ipV'f =qf

Figure 1.5-6 Dp va Velacity

As you can see, parasite drag varies directly with velocity squared (V2 ). This means that if you double your speed, you will create four times as much parasite drag. Figure 1.5-6 graphically depicts parasite drag versus velocity.

1.5-5

INDUCED DRAG INFINITE WING Consider a wing placed in a wind tunnel with the tips flush against the walls. For all practical purposes it has no wingtips,and is called an infinite wing. The DOWN WASH relative wind on an infinite wing can only flow chordwise,and therefore produces lift. As the Figure 1.5-7 Upwash and Downwash relative wind flows around the infinite wing, the high pressure air under the leading edge attempts to equalize with the low pressure air above the wing. The shortest route is around the leading edge. This results in some of the air that should have passed under the wing flowing up and over the leading edge, called upwash (Figure 1.5-7). Upwash increases lift because it increases the average angle of attack on the wing. Some of the air on top of the wing also flows down and under the trailing edge, called downwash. Downwash decreases lift by reducing the average angle of attack on the wing . For an infinite wing. the upwash exactly balances the downwash resulting in no net change in lift. Upwash and downwash exist any time an airfoil produces lift. FINITE WING Upwash and downwash are not equal on a finite wing (Figure 1.5-8). Not only does air flow up around the leading edge of a finite wing producing upwash, it also flows around the wingtips. Some of the high pressure air in the leading edge stagnation point flows spanwise to the wingtips instead of chordwise over the upper surface of '" " the wing. Once it reaches the wingtips it f1owaround the wingtips and up to the upper surface of the Figure 1.5-8 Finite Wing wing. There, it combines with the chordwise flow that has already produced lift and adds to the downwash. Downwash approximately doubles by this process due to the spanwise airflow moving around the wingtip. The circular motion imparted to the increased downwash also results in the formation of wingtip vortices.

1.5-6

Induced drag (01) is that portion of total drag associated with the production of lift. We can add the airflow at the leading edge and the airflow at the trailing edge of the wing in order to determine the average relative wind in the immediate vicinity of our wing. Since there is twice as much downwash as upwash on a finite wing, the average relative wind has a downward slant compared to the free airstream relative wind. The total lift vector will now be incline aft in order to remain perpendicular to the average Figure 1.5-9 Induced Drag relative wind. The total lift vector has components that are perpendicular and parallel to the free airstream relative wind. The perpendicular component of total lift is called effective lift. Because total lift is inclined aft, effective lift will be less than total lift. The parallel component of total lift is called induced drag since it acts in the same direction as drag and tends to retard the forward motion of the airplane (Figure 1.5-9). The Dj equation below is derived from the aerodynamic force equatiC?n:

Analyzing the equation shows that increasing the weight of an airplane will increase induced drag, since a heavier airplane requires more lift to maintain level flight. Induced drag is reduced by increasing density (p), velocity M , or the wingspan (b) . In level flight where lift is constant, induced drag varies inversely with velocity-, and directly with angle of attack (Figure 1.5-10). Another method to reduce induced drag . is to install devices that impede the spanwise airflow going around the wingtip. These devices include winglets, wingtip tanks, and missile rails.

i VElOCITV (TAS')

Figure 1.5-10 D\ vs Velocity

1.5-7

TOTAL DRAG Now that we have discussed both parasite and induced drag, we will add them together to create a total drag curve. By superimposing both drag curves on the same graph, and adding the values of induced and parasite drag at each velocity, we have the total drag curve (Figure 1.5-11). The numbers 1, 9, and 28 depicted near the curve are the angle of attack scale. You should realize that the drag curve depicted is particular to one weight, one altitude and one configuration. As weight, altitude and configuration vary, the total drag curve will shift.

~ Q

VELOCIlY (TAS)

Figure 1.5-11 Totai Drag

LIFT TO DRAG RATIO An airfoil is designed to produce lift, but drag is unavoidable. An airfoil that produces the desired lift bur causes an excess amount of drag would not be · very useful. We use the lift to drag ratio (UO) to determine the efficiency of an airfoil. A high UO ratio indicates a more efficient airfoil. UO is calculated by dividing lift by drag. All terms except CL and Co cancel out. 2

L _ 1/2pV SC,o _ C/o D 1/ 2pV SCJ) CD

-.n /

L

I

C,

UI

IYn , 0.8

/

.....-1 '""-

I

aM

-......

lUI

J

0.12

I

:

V

~.-r l ~

•

•

... ~ 11

I

.......... /

•

YO

I,.

'I

l.A

14

1,2

!,

11

:N

r7

1.0

to I

0.1

0.2

»

I.

Ju.

I i~ DA

,co""V

I.

~

/ .~ I

;/

IC

I ./

o

r--.... /........

V

i/

/

./

~

CL

• 04 I

~

AHBLEOP ArrACK

2

Figure 1..5-12 lift to Drag Ratio

A ratio of the coefficients at a certain angle of attack determines the UD ratio at that angle of attack. The UO ratio can be plotted against angle of attack along with CL and CD (Figure 1.5-12). The maximum UO ratio is called UOMAX. For the airplane in Figure 1.5-11, UO MAX AOA is 9 units. Since angle of attack indicators are far less precise than airspeed indicators, pilots will usually fly an airspeed that corresponds to UDMAXAOA. The T-37 uses 125 KIAS to approximate UOMAX.

1.5-8

1. UDMAX ADA produces the minimum total drag . UDMAX is located at the bottom of the total drag curve. Any movement away from UDMAX will increase drag. 2. At U DMAX ADA, parasite drag and induced drag are equal. At velocities below UDMAX, the airplane is affected primarily by induced drag, while at velocities above UDMAX , the airplane is affected primarily by parasite drag. 3. ~ ADA produces the greatest ratio of lift to drag. Note that this is not the maximum amount of lift. 4. UDMAX ADA is the most efficient angle of attack. Note that UD is the efficiency of the wing , not the engine. An increase in weight or altitude will increase UDMAX airspeed, but not affect UDMAX or UDMAX ADA. A change in configuration may have a large effect on UDMAX and UDMAX airspeed. The effect of configuration on UDMAXAOA will depend on what causes the change (lowering landing gear or flaps, dropping external stores, speed brakes, etc.), and how much change is produced. These changes in UDMAX will be in the thrust and power lesson.

1.5-9

STUDY QUESTIONS Drag

1.

Define drag and list the factors that affect it.

2.

What happens to the coefficient of drag with an increase in angle of attack? When will the coefficient of drag equal zero?

3.

Define parasite drag and name the three primary types.

4.

State the equation for parasite drag, and identify its variables.

5.

State methods of reducing each type of parasite drag.

6.

Graph parasite drag vs velocity and describe their relationship.

1.5-10

· 7.

Describe the results of upwash and downwash around an infinite airfoil.

8.

Describe the airflow about a finite wing. What is the result of upwash and downwash on a finite wing?

9.

Define induced drag and describe how it is formed.

10.

State the equation for induced drag, and identify its variables.

11.

What can be done to reduce induced drag?

12.

Graph induced drag vs velocity and describe their relationship.

13.

State the equations for total drag.

1.5-11

14.

Increasing airspeed while maintaining level flight will cause: (You may select more than one.) A. B. C. D.

An increase in induced drag An increase in parasite drag A decrease in induced drag A decrease in parasite drag

15.

What does the UD ratio represent? How is it calculated? How does a pilot determine what UD ratio they are flying at?

16.

Define UD MAX . Locate UD MAX on the total drag curve. Why is it important?

1.5-12

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Thrust and Power Assignment Sheet No. 1.6.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding thrust and thrust horsepower curves as they relate to aerodynamics. lESSON TOPIC lEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.76

Describe the relationship between thrust and power.

1.77

Define thrust required and power required.

1.78

Describe how thrust required and power required varies with velocity.

1.79

State the location of UDMAX on the thrust required and power required curves.

1.80

Define thrust available and power available.

1.81

Describe the effects of throttle setting , velocity. and density on thrust available and power available for a turbojet engine.

1.82

Describe the effects of pel setting, velocitY, and density on thrust available and power available for a turboprop engine.

1.83

Define thrust horsepower. shaft horsepower. and propeller efficiency.

1.84

State the relationship between thrust horsepower, shaft horsepower, and propeller efficiency.

1.85

State the flat rated shaft horsepower and the Navy limited shaft horsepower of the T-34C PT6A-25 engine.

1.6-1

1.86

State the instrument indications for the flat rated shaft horsepower and the Navy limited shaft horsepower of the T-34C PT6A-25 engine.

1.87

State the sea level rated thrust of each T-37B J69-T-25A engine.

1.88

State the instrument indications for the sea level rated thrust of the T-37B J69-T-25A engine.

1.89

Define thrust excess and power excess.

1.90

State the effects of a thrust excess or a power excess.

1.91

State the conditions necessary to achieve the maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess for a turbojet and a turboprop airplane.

1.92

Describe the effects of changes in weight on thrust required, power required, thrust available, and power available.

1.93

Describe the effects of changes in weight on maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess, and on the airspeeds necessary to achieve maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess.

1.94

Describe the effects of changes in altitude on thrust required, power required, thrust available, and power available.

1.95

Describe the effeds of changes in altitude on maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess, and on the airspeeds necessary to achieve maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess.

1.96

Describe the effects of changes in configuration on thrust required, power required, thrust available, and power available.

1.97

Describe the effeds of changes in configuration on maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess, and on the airspeeds necessary to achieve maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.6.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.6-2

INFORMATION SHEET Thrust and Power Information Sheet No. 1.6.11 INTRODUCTION Performance is the study of the capabilities of an airplane as affected by the forces of lift, weight, thrust, and drag. The various aspects of airplane performance result from a combination of airframe and powerplant characteristics. These characteristics at various conditions of flight are depicted on thrust and power curves. These charts can be used to find maximum endurance, range, angle of climb, rate of climb, glide endurance and glide range. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapters 8 & 9

3.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION THRUST AND POWER CURVES In order to gain an understanding of various performance profiles, we must first establish some assumptions about our airplane and the charts we are about to use:

1.

EQUILIBRIUM FLIGHT ON A STANDARD DAY.

2.

NO AFTERBURNER FOR A TURBOJET.

3.

FIXED PITCH PROPELLER FOR A TURBOPROP.

THRUST REQUIRED Recall that the total drag curve is the sum of paraSite and induced drag. In equilibrium flight total thrust must equal total drag. Therefore, the amount of thrust that is required to overcome drag can be found on the total drag curve (Figure 1.6-1). This is called thrust required (TR), and is expressed in pounds (Figure 1.6-2). As with the drag curve, the thrust required curve is for one specific weight, altitude and configuration. UDMAX AOA is the pOint of minimum thrust required. Flight at velocities greater than UDMAX require a reduction in AOA (to maintain a constant liftlweight ratio) and an increase in thrust (to match the increase in parasite drag). Flight at velocities less than U D MAX require an increase in angle of attack and an increase in thrust (to match the increase in induced drag).

1.6-3

Thrust Required

VELOCITY erAS)

Figure 1.6-1 Total Drag

veLOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.6-2 Thrust Required

POWER REQUIRED Power is the rate of doing work, and work is a force times a distance. Power required (PR) is the amount of power that is required to produce thrust required. We can multiply T R by velocity to find PRo We must divide by 325 in order for our units to convert properly to horsepower. Thus, thrust horsepower only depends on thrust and velocity. For simplicity, we will use the term power (P) rather than thrust horsepower (THP) or shaft horsepower (SHP) unless there is a significant difference.

To find UDMAX on the thrust required curve, draw a horizontal line tangent to the bottom of the curve. By applying the power equation to this line, the result is a ~, straight line from the origin that is tangent to the power curve at ~ UDMAX. Unlike the TR curve, UDMAX is not at the bottom of the PR curve, but is to the right of the bottom of the curve. UDMAX still represents minimum total drag, but minimum PR is to the left of UDMAX. It should be noted that the velocity and ADA for UD MAX are the same on the PR curve as on the T R curve (Figure 1.6-3).

Power ~equired

VELOCI'IY (fAS)

Figura 1.6-3 Power Required

1.6-4

THRUST AVAILABLE

Thrust Available Oet)

Thrust Available (prop) (Full POL)

(Full Throme)

...

(I)

:;)

a:: ~~~~~~Th~~~~ ) -------T---------

A

VELOCITY (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.6-4 Jet,Thrust Available

Figure 1.6-5 Prop Thrust Available

Thrust available (TA) is the amount of thrust that the airplane's engines are actually producing at a given throttle setting. velocity. and density. The most important factor is the throttle, called the power control lever (pel) in turboprops. For simplicity, we will use the term throttle. Maximum engine output occurs at full throttle. As the throttle is retarded, thrust available decreases. Since the propeller can only accelerate the air to a maximum velocity, as the velocity of the incoming air increases, the air is accelerated less through the propeller, and thrust available decreases {Figure 1.6-5). Turbojets do not suffer a decrease in thrust available with velocity because rameffect overcomes the decreased acceleration (Figure 1.6-4). Therefore, TA is approximated by a straight line. As the density of the air decreases, thrust available also decreases. At sea level, each J69-T-25A engine in the T-37B is flat rated at 1025 pounds of thrust at 100% RPM but is limited to 95% RPM for continuous operation. POWER AVAILABLE

T·V

Power avanable (P A) is the amount of power that the =.......:..:.A_ _ airplane's engine(s) is(are) actually producing, at a given throttle A 325 setting. velocity, and density. The most important factor is throttle setting. Maximum power available occurs at full throttle. As the throttle is retarded, power available decreases. As velocity increases, power available for a jet will increase linearly, while power available for a prop will initially increase, but will then decrease due to a decrease in thrust available (Figure 1.6-6 and 1.6-7). As thrust available decreases with a decrease in density, power available will also decrease. At sea level, the PT6A-25 engine in the T-34C is flat rated at 550 SHP (1315 ft-Ibs of torque), but is Navy limited to 425 SHP (1015 ft-Ibs oftorque) in order to extend the service life of the engine.

P

1.6-5

Power Available Oet)

Power Available (prop)

(Half PC

VELOCITY (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.6-6 Jet Power Available

Figure 1.6-7 Prop Power Available

In a turboprop, power available is determined by the performance ofthe engine/propeller combination. Engine output is called shaft horsepower (SHP). Thrust horsepower (THP) is propeller output, or the horsepower that is converted to thrust by the propeller. The ability of the propeller to turn engine output into thrust is given by its propeller efficiency (p.e.). Under ideal conditions, SHP would equal THP, but due to friction in the gearbox and propeller drag, THP is always less than SHP. Propeller efficiency is always less than 100%.

THP = SHp· p.e. The T-34C has a constant-speed, variable-pitch propeller. Propeller efficiency will decrease as altitude increases. As the air density decreases, the blade angle will increase as the propeller takes a bigger "bite" of air to maintain a constant rpm of 2200. At some point the blade angle will reach an optimum angle, beyond which efficiency will decrease with further increases in blade angle. Note that a variable pitch, constantspeed propeller is more efficient than a fixed pitch propeller which is the basis of our thrust and power curves. THRUST EXCESS AND POWER EXCESS

A comparison of the T Rand TA curves on one graph allows us to predict airplane performance. To maintain equilibrium level flight, thrust available must equal thrust required for a specific angle of attack and velocity. This is depicted on a graph where the T Rand TA curves cross. The right-hand point of eqUilibrium will produce the maximum velocity in level flight. This is the greatest airspeed that the aircraft can maintain without descending. It is approximately 190 KIAS at sea level for the T-34C. A thrust excess (Te) occurs if thrust available is greater than thrust required at a particular velocity. A positive T E causes an acceleration, a climb, or both, depending on angle of attack. A negative T E is called a thrust deficit and has the opposite effect. Maximum thrust excess occurs at a full throttle setting, and is depicted on a graph where the distance between the T A and TR curves is greatest (Figure 1.6-8 & Figure 1.69). For a turbojet. max thrust excess occurs at UDMAX. For a turboprop. max thrust 1.6-6

excess occurs at a velocity less than UD MAX .

I

Max Thrust Excess

Oet)

Max Thrust Excess (prop) (Full PCL)

(Full T)1ronle)

veLOCITY (TAS)

VELOCITV (TAS)

Figure 1.6-8 Jet Thrust Excess

Figure 1.6-9 Prop Thrust Excess

Power excess (Pe) is calculated in a similar manner as T E and will also produce an acceleration, a climb, or both (Figure 1.6-10 & Figure 1.6-11). Likewise, a power deficit will cause a decent, a deceleration , or both . For a turbojet. max power excess occurs at a velocity greater than UD MAX . For a turboprop. max power excesS occurs at: ~. It is important to note that max power excess is achieved at a greater veJocity and a lower angle of attack than max thrust excess. It should also be noted that you cannot have a power excess if thrust excess is zero.

PE=~-~ Max Power Excess (prop) (Fun PCL)

Max Power Excess-

Oet)

VELOcITY (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAB)

Figure 1.6-10 Jet Power Excess

Figure 1.6-11 Prop Power Excess

1.6-7

FACTORS AFFECTING Te AND PE

EFFECT OF WEIGHT

Effect of Weight on

TI:'lr.ust Required

If an airplane is in equilibrium level flight at a constant angle of attack, an increase in weight requires an increase in 1 lift. In order to increase lift at a constant AOA, velocity must increase. This shifts the T R curve to the right (Figure 1.6-12). A higher velocity and more lift increase both parasite and induced drag, therefore total drag increases, which shifts the T R curve up.

VELOCITY (TAS)

wt=L t=1/2pV 2

t

SC L

2

t

SCD

TR t=Dt=1/2pV

Figure 1.6-12 Weight vs TR Power required (PR) is similarly affected by weight. An increase in weight requires an increase in velocity and a corresponding increase in thrust required (TR) at a specific angle of attack. Since PR is a function of thrust required and velocity, an increase in weight will result in an increase in power required . The net result of an increase in weight is that the TR.M!Q PR curves will shift UP and RIGHT (Figure 1.6-13).

Effect of Weight on Power Required

9 VELOCIlY (TAS,

Figure 1.6-13 Weight vs Pi! Weight changes have NO effect on thrust available or power available. The engine will produce the same thrust even if it is completely removed from the airplane. As weight increases, thrust required and power required increase while thrust available and power available remain constant. Thus thrust excess and power excess decrease at every AOA and velocitv.

1.6-8

· EFFECT OF ALTITUDE

Effect of Altitude on Thrust Required

9

9

VELOCITY (TAS)

If an airplane weighs 5,000 Ibs at sea level, it requires 5,000 Ibs of lift. It will weigh 5,000 Ibs and require the same lift at FL200. Since density has decreased, velocity must increase to maintain 5,000 Ibs of lift. As altitude increases, the T R curve moves to a higher velocity, but drag and T R remain constant. With an increase in altitude, the thrust required curve SHIFTS TO THE RIGHT. NOT UP (Figure 1.6-14).

W

=L =~ p

-J.. V'

t sc,

Figure 1.6-14 Altitude vs TR

1'. = D = ~ p -J.. V' t Since power required is a function of thrust required and velocity, it will shift to the right as the T R curve shifts. However, since we are multiplying the same thrust by a higher velocity, the power curve will move up as well. Therefore , with an increase in altitude, the power required curve shifts UP AND TO THE RIGHT (Fig,ur$ 1.6-15). Both the T Rand PR curves flatten slightly because of the decreasing effects of compressibility .

SCD

Effect of AJtltude

on

Power Requlred

VELOCITY (TAa)

Flgure 1.6-15 Altitude vs P R

1.6-9

Effect of Altitude on Jet.Thrust Avanable CFuI

(FrJlI Pe L.)

~J

Effect of Altitude on prop

Thrust Available

Sea Level

VE\.DC1TV {TAl)

VE1.OCI1Y (TAS)

Figure 1.6-16 Altitude vs Jet TA

Rgure 1.6-17 Altitude vs Prop TA

Effect 01 Altitude on Prop Power Available

Effect of Altitude on Jet Power Available

(MJI PeL)

20,000 ft.

Figure 1.6-18 Altitude vs Jet PA

Rgure 1.6-19 Altitude vs Prop PA

Maximum engine output decreases with a reduction in air density. Thus, both ~ and PA decrease at higher altitudes (Figure 1.6-16 thru Figure 1.6-19). Thrust excess will decrease with an increase in altitude due to the decrease in thrust available. Power excess will decrease as altitude increases because power available decreases and power required increases.

1.6-10

EFFECT OF CONFIGURATION

Effect of Landing Gear on Power Required

Effect of Landing Gear on Thrust Required

28

.. VEl.OCllY erAS)

, ., j,.

Agure 1.S.21 Landing Gearvs P R

Figure 1.6-20 Landing Gear vs TR

Lowering the landing gear increases parasite drag which causes thrust required (TR) and power required (PR) to increase (Figures 1.6-20 and 21). Thus more thrust and power are required to maintain altitude for any given velocity. Thrust and power · available are not affected by the landing gear. Thrust and power exeess will decrease with deployment of the landing gear because thrust and power required increase.

Effect of Flaps

Effect of Flaps

on Thrust Required

Power Required

UD MAX

on

9 VELOCITY (TAS)

Ftgure ·1.&-23 Flaps vs PA

Figure 1.6-22 Flaps vs T R

Lowering the flaps increases lift, induced drag, and parasite drag. Both the thrust required and power required curves move up and to the left (Figures 1.6-22 and 23). More thrust and power are required to maintain altitude for any given velocity. Thrust and power available are not affected by the flaps. Thrust and power excess will decrease with deployment of the flaps because thrust and power required increase.

1.6-11

STUDY QUESTIONS Thrust and Power

1.

Define thrust required. Where does the TR curve come from?

2.

How is power computed from thrust?

3.

Minimum T R occurs _ _ _ _ UDMAX and minimum PR occurs _ _ __ UDMAX.

A.

at, faster than

B.

slower than, at

C.

at, slower than

D.

faster than, at

4.

Define thrust available and power available.

5.

The T-34C is powered by the Pratt & Whitney ___ turboprop engine. It can produce SHP, but is Navy limited to SHP at 2200 RPM.

1.6-12

6.

The T-37B is powered by two Continental turbojet engines. At sea level, each can produce pounds of thrust.

7.

The angle of attack for max T E will be _ _ _ _ _ for a turbojet and _ _ __ for a turboprop?

8.

A.

less than UDMAX AOA, equal to UDMAX AOA

B.

equal to UDMAX AOA, less than UDMAX AOA

C.

equal to UDMAX AOA, greater than UDMAX AOA

D.

greater than UDMAX AOA, equal to UDMAX AOA

The airspeed for max PE will be _ _ _ _ _ for a turbojet and ____ for a turboprop?

A.

less than UDMAX, equal to UDMAX

B.

equal to UDMAX, less than UDMAX

C.

equal to UDMAX, greater than UDMAX

D.

greater than UDMAX , equal to UDMAX

9.

How are the TRand PR curves affected by increased weight? Increased altitude?

10.

How are TA and PA affected by throttle/pel setting? Byaltitude? By weight?

11.

How do altitude and weight affect PE and TE?

1.6-13

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.6-14

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Aircraft Performance Assignment Sheet No. 1.7.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding thrust and power as they relate to aircraft performance. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic:

1.98

State the relationship between fuel flow, thrust available, thrust required, and velocity for a turbojet airplane in straight and level flight.

1.99

State the relationship between fuel flow, power available, power required, and velocity for a turboprop airplane in straight and level flight.

1.100

Define maximum endurance and maximum range.

1.101

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMAX, at which turbojet and turboprop airplanes achieve maximum endurance.

1.102

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMAX , at which turbojet and turboprop airplanes achieve maximum range.

1.103

Describe the effect of changes in weight, altitude, configuration, and wind on maximum endurance and maximum range performance and airspeed.

1.104

Define maximum angle of climb and maximum rate of climb.

1.105

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMAX, at which turbojet and turboprop airplanes achieve maximum angle of climb.

1.106

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMAX, at which turbojet and turboprop airplanes achieve maximum rate of climb.

1.7-1

.

1.107

Describe the effect of changes in weight, altitude, configuration, and wind on maximum angle of climb and maximum rate of climb performance and airspeed.

1.108

Define absolute ceiling, service ceiling, cruise ceiling, combat ceiling, and maximum operating ceiling.

1.109

State the maximum operating ceiling of the T-34 and T-37.

1.110

Define maximum glide range and maximum glide endurance.

1.111

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMA)(, at which an airplane achieves maximum glide range.

1.112

State the angle of attack and velocity, compared to UDMA)(, at which an airplane achieves maximum glide endurance.

1.113

Describe the effects of changes in weight, altitude, configuration, wind, and propeller feathering on maximum glide range and maximum glide endurance performance and airspeed.

1.114

Define the regions of normal and reverse command as they relate to maximum endurance angle of attack and velocity.

1.115

Describe the relationship between velocity and throttle setting required to maintain level flight within the region of normal and reverse command.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.7.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.7-2

INFORMATION SHEET Aircraft Performance Information Sheet No.1. 7 .11 INTRODUCTION The thrust and power curves allow us to find maximum endurance, range, angle of climb, rate of climb, glide endurance and glide range. We will be concerned with only the most basic concepts in this area. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots Chapters 10, 11 and 12

3.

Flig ht Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1) Section III, Appendix

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION LEVEL FLIGHT PERFORMANCE Fuel flow is the rate of fuel consumption by the engine, measured in pounds per hour (pph). Since the supply offuel onboard is limited, the engine's fuel flow is a critical determinant of how 19n9 and how far the airplane can fly. A turbojet engine directly produces thrust through its exhaust. Therefore, the fuel consumed by a turbojet engine is proportional to its thrust available (TA)' In order to maintain equilibrium flight, thrust available must be set equal to thrust required (TR), therefore we say that minimum fuel flow for a turbojet is found on the thrust required curve. The thrust provided by a propeller is not produced directly by the engine, so there is no direct relationship between thrust and fuel flow. The engine turns a shaft that turns the propeller that produces the thrust. In turning the shaft, the engine produces power. Therefore, for a turboprop, fuel flow varies directly with the power output of the engine (PA). However, minimum fuel flow for equilibrium flight will be found on the power required (PR) curve. Maximum endurance and maximum range are both achieved in equilibrium, level flight. Any thrust or power excess would cause the airplane to either climb or accelerate. We will look on the thrust required or power required curve to determine the velocity that our aircraft must fly. Once the velocity is determined, the pilot must adjust the throttle to eliminate any thrust or power excess.

1.7-3

MAXIMUM ENDURANCE Maximum endurance is the maximum amount of time that an airplane can remain airborne on a given amount of fuel. The slower an engine burns fuel, the longer the airplane can remain airborne. Minimum fuel flow occurs at minimum T R for a turbojet and minimum PR for a turboprop. Therefore, maximum endurance is found at ~AOA and velocity for a turbojet (Figure 1.7-1) and at a velocity less than UDMAX, and an angle of attack greater than UDMAXAOA for a turboprop (Figure 1.7-2). For the T-34C, max endurance is achieved at apprOXimately 420 ft-lbs of torque. Since the T378 does not have an AOA indicator, maximum endurance at any weight with gear, flaps and speed brake up is approximately 125 KIAS.

Max Endurance Oat)

Max Endl:,(rance (prop)

VELOCITY etAS}

VELOClTV (TAS)

Flgufe' .7-1 Turbojet Max Endurance

Figure 1.7-2 Turboprop Max Endurance

MAXIMUM RANGE Maximum range is the maximum distance traveled over the ground for a given amount of fuel. To find maximum range we must minimize fuel flow per unit of velocity. Any straight line drawn from the origin represents a constant ratio of fuel flow to velocity. The minimum ratio that allows the aircraft to remain airborne occurs where the line from the origin is tangent to the T R curve for jets or the PR curve for props. Maximum range for a turbojet is found at a velocity greater than UD MAX and an angle of attack less than UD~ (Figure 1.7-3). Maximum range for a turboprop is found at UDMAXAOA and velocity (Figure 1.7-4). Maximum range with no wind is achieved in the T-34 at approximately 580 ft-Ibs of torque. Maximum range in the T-378 is calculated using the charts in part IV of Appendix I in the flight manual. Note that maximum range is faster than maximum endurance.

1.7-4

Max Range Oet}

Max Range (prop)

VELOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.7-3 Turbojet Max Range

veLOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.7-4 Turboprop Max Range

ENDURANCE AND RANGE FACTORS

If the weight of an airplane increases, as explained in Chapter 6, the thrust required curve (Figure 1.6-12) and the power required curve (Figure 1.6-13) will both shift to the right and up. The shift to the right is due to the higher velocity required to produce more lift. Since thrust represents fuel flow for a turbojet, as T R increases so will fuel flow for a turbojet. As PR increases, fuel flow for a turboprop will increase. Higher fuel flow means maximum endurance performance will decrease with an increase in weight and max endurance airspeed will increases. The increased fuel flow will also decrease maximum range performance and increase max range airsp~ed. An increase in altitude moves the thrust required curve to the right (Figure 1.614) and the power required curve to the right and up (Figure 1.6-15). However, as altitude increases (sea level to 36,000 ft MSL), the temperature rapidly decreases (to56.5°C at FL360). Decreased temperatures make turbine engines more fuel efficient, requiring less fuel for a given amount of thrust or power. Although the pilot physically increases the throttle setting as altitude increases , fuel flow DECREASES. Since the aircraft is burning less fuel to remain airborne, maximum endurance performance increases with an increase in altitude. An airplane at a higher altitude will fly at a greater TAS while burning less fuel. Since the fuel consumed per mile flown has decreases, an increase in altitude increases maximum range performance. With the same increase in altitude, turbojet aircraft will notice a greater gain in performance than turboprop aircraft. This is due, in part, to the loss of propeller efficiency with altitude. Early turboprop aircraft experienced a loss of performance with an increase in altitude. Configuration changes will affect both max endurance and max range. Lowering the landing gear or flaps causes the thrust required and power required curves to shift up (Figure 1.6-20 through Figure 1.6-23). Max endurance and max range will decrease . with landing gear and/or flaps extended. 1.7-5

Max Range Get) Wind Corrected

I

Max Range (prop) (Wind Corrected)

28

50 KNOT ...HEADWINQ/'" UDIoIA)( VElOCITY

erAS)

Figure 1.7-5 Turbojet Max Range (corrected for headwind)

V!l.DCITY

rrAS)

Figure 1.7·6 Turboprop Max Range (corrected for headwind)

Since range is distance over the ground, ground speed must be considered when determining the effect of wind on maximum range. When we fly into a headwind, our ground speed is less than our true airspeed. Therefore, the range of the airplane decreases since less ground will be covered in a given time . Headwinds will decrease maximum range performance while tailwinds will increase maximum range performance. Winds will have no effect on maximum endurance performance. To partially make up for the decreased performance with a headwind, we can increase the TAS of the airplane. ·We cannot totally make up for the distance lost, but some of the headwind effect can be overcome. Consider the extreme case of an airplane flying into a headwind that equals TAS, i.e., ground speed and range are zero. Any increase in true airspeed would increase range. The straight line drawn from the origin tangent to the T R or PR curve represents a ratio of fuel flow to AIRSPEED. To make the tangent line represent a ratio of fuel flow to GROUND SPEED we must subtract headwind or add a tailwind to true airspeed. With a headwind, move the beginning of the tangent to the right of the origin by the amount of the headwind velocity (Figure 1.7-5 & Figure 1.7-6). The airspeed under the new tangent point is the velocity needed to fly maximum range with the headwind. With a tailwind, move the beginning of the tangent to the left of the origin by the amount of the tailwindwind velocity . CLIMB PERFORMANCE

A "steady climb" is defined as a climb in which the airplane is not accelerating. Therefore the airplane is still in equilibrium. However, the altitude is no longer constant. In this discussion, we will still use the thrust and power curves (the same ones used to analyze level flight) to discuss and locate the different climb performance parameters of our airplane. .

1.7-6

The two types of climb performance that we will be concerned with are angle of climb and rate of climb. Angle of climb (Y, AOe) is a comparison of altitude gained to distance traveled. For maximum angle of climb, we want maximum vertical velocity (altitude increase) for a minimum horizontal velocity (ground speed). Max Aoe is commonly used when taking off from a short airfield surrounded by high obstacles, such as trees, or power lines. The objective is to gain sufficient altitude to clear the obstacle with the least horizontal distance traveled. Rate of climb (ROC) is a comparison of altitude gained relative to the time needed to reach that altitude. Flying at maximum rate of climb yields a maximum vertical velocity. Maximum rate of climb is used if you need to expedite your climb to an assigned altitude due to conflicting traffic. You need to gain the greatest vertical distance in the shortest time possible (Figure 1.7-7).

w o

j:: ~ <

DISTANCE

Figure 1.7-7 Max AOe vs Max ROe

In a maximum angle of climb profile, an airplane takes 30 seconds to reach 1000 feet AGL, but covers only 3000 feet over the ground. Using its maximum rate of climb profile, the same airplane climbs to 1500 feet in 30 seconds, but covers 6000 feet across the ground. It should be noted that both climb profiles are executed at maximum throttle setting. Therefore, differences between max rate and max angle of climb lie solely in differences of angle of attack and velocity.

1.7-7

ANGLE OF CLIMB

THRUST

The equations that represent equilibrium in a climb are:

L = Wcosy

HORIZON

T = D+Wsiny By rearranging the bottom equation, we see that: WEIGHT

. siny = T-D = T-TR_TE _ A_ _

W

W

W Figure 1.7-8 Climb Forces

Thus, angle of climb performance depends upon thrust excess. Essentially, the greater the force that pushes the airplane upwards, the steeper it can climb. Maximum angle of climb occurs at the velocity and angle of attack that produce the maximum thrust excess. Therefore, maximum angle of climb for a turbojet occurs at UDMAX8Q8 and velocity (Figure 1.7-9). Maximum angle of climb for a turboprop occurs at a velocity less than UDMAX and an angle of attack greater than UDMAX8Q8 (Figure 1.7-10). Maximum angle of climb airspeed Nxl is approximately 125 KIAS for the T-37 and 75 KIAS for the T-34 (Figure 1.7-8).

Max AOe Get)

Max Aoe (prop)

LJOw.x VELOCITY (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.7-9 Turbojet Angle of Climb

Figure 1.7-10 Turboprop Angle of Climb

1.7-8

RATE OF CLIMB Rate of climb is simply the vertical component of velocity (Figure 1.7-11):

ROC = Vsiny

.

sIny

T =T - T =~ A

R

W

V sin

W

'Y

By substitution:

ROC =Vsiny

= VI'. =1'.

Figure 1.7-11 Velocity Vector Diagram

w w

Thus, rate of climb performance depends upon power excess. Since climbing is work and power is the rate of doing work, any power that is not used to maintain level flight can increase the rate of climbing. Maximum rate of climb occurs at the velocity and angle of attack that produce the maximum power excess. Therefore, maximum rate of climb for a turbojet occurs at a velocity greater than UDMAX and an angle of attack less than UDMAX8Q8 (Fig ure 1.7-12). Maximum rate of climb for a turboprop occurs at UDMAXAOA and velocity (Figure 1.7-13) . Maximum rate of climb airspeed Ny) is approximately 180 KJAS below 10,000 feet MSL and 160 KIAS above 10,000 feet MSL for the T-37 and 100 KIAS for the T-34.

Max ROC Oet)

Max ROC (prop)

VELOCI'N (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAS)

Figure 1.7-12 Turbojet Rate 'of Climb

Agure 1.7-13 Turboprop Rate· of Climb

1.7-9

CLIMB PERFORMANCE FACTORS Since weight, altitude, and configuration changes affect thrust and power excess, they will also affect climb performance. Climb performance is directly dependent upon the ability to produce either a thrust excess or a power excess. In the last chapter, it was determined that an increase in weight, an increase in altitude, lowering the landing gear, or lowering the flaps will all decrease both maximum thrust excess and maximum power excess for all aircraft. Therefore maximum angle of climb and maximum rate of climb performance will decrease under any of these conditions.

Consider an airplane that has a maximum angle of climb TAS of 75 knots, a ground speed of 60 knats, and no wind. If this airplane flies into a headwind of 20 knots, its ground speed is reduced to 40 knots. The headwind has increased the airplane's maximum angle of climb, because it reaches the same altitude as before with a smaller distance covered over the ground. A tailwind has the opposite effect (Figure 1.7-14). Wind does not affect rate of climb performance.

HeADYllNC

~

TAILWIND

Figure 1.7-14 Wind Effect on Max AOe

CEILINGS As an airplane climbs and Pe decreases, the rate of climb will also decrease. The altitude where maximum power excess allows only 500 feet per minute rate of climb is called the combat ceiling. Cruise ceiling is the altitude that an airplane can maintain a maximum climb rate of only 300 f.p .m. Service ceiling is the altitude that an airplane can maintain a maximum rate of climb of only 100 f.p.m. Eventually, the airplane will reach an altitude where maximum power excess is zero. At this altitude, the airplane can no longer perform a steady climb - its maximum rate of climb is zero. The altitude at which this occurs is called the absolute ceiling. If the airplane flies at its maximum rate of climb velocity, it will only be possible to maintain level equilibrium flight. At any velocity other than this, PR will exceed PAl and the airplane wnl descend. Both the T-34 and the T-37 are limited to a maximum operating ceiling of 25.000 feet. Federal Aviation Regulations prohibit unpressurized aircraft from exceeding 25,000 feet unless all occupants are wearing full pressure suits.

1.7-10

GLIDE PERFORMANCE Gliding is a condition of flight without any operatlng engine. It does not refer to a single engine failure in a multi-engine airplane. When our engine fails, we may need to glide as far as possible to reach a safe landing area. This is a maximum glide range profile (Figure 1.7-15). If we lose power within easy reach of a safe runway, we may decide to fly a maximum glide endurance profile while the runway is being cleared. The equations that represent equilibrium in a glide are:

L

= WCOSr

HORIZON

WEIGHT

Figure 1.7-15 Glide Forces

D = Wsinr GLIDE RANGE To aGhieve maximum glide range, a pilot should maintain the minimum glide angle. Rearranging the above equation:

.

SIn

Max Glide Range

r = -D = T-TR_TD --:..:..A_--,-,-

W

W

W

Thus, the angle of descent is directly related to the thrust deficit, To. To achieve the minimum angle of descent, we must minimize the thrust deficit, which occurs at .. Minimum lIDfoW( ;. Thrust Deficit UD MAX (Figure 1.7-16). Therefore. maximum glide range occurs at UDMAX. VELOCITY (TAS) Maximum glide range velocity (VBEST) is UDMAX for any airplane regardless of engine Figure 1.7·16 Max Glide Range type. Since the UD ratio is determined by angle of attack, any change away from UD MAX angle of attack would result in a decreased UD ratio and a decrease in glide range. By holding a constant AOA, we can maintain a constant UD ratio , regardless of weight or velocity. ~EST is 100 KIAS for the T-34 and 125 KIAS for the T-37. Glide range is often expressed as a ratio of horizontal distance to vertical distance. A glide ratio of 12:1 indicates that an airplane will move forward 12 feet for every foot of altitude lost.

1.7-11

1

GLIDE ENDURANCE Maximizing glide endurance is simply a matter of minimizing rate of descent (ROD) or negative vertical velocity (Figure 1.7-17).

V sin

"1

ROD = Vsiny . siny

D

T

=-=~

Figure 1.7..17 Velocity Vector Diagram

W W

By substituting:

Max Glide

ROD = Vsinr = VT

D

W

-

~ W

To minimize the rate of descent, the pilot must fly at the velocity where the minimum power deficit occurs. This is at the bottom of the P R curve (Figure 1.7-18). Maximum glide endurance velocity is less VELOCrrY (fAS) than UD MAX velocity, and the angle of attack for max glide endurance is greater Rgure 1.7-18 Max Glide Endurance than UDMAXAOA. Maximum glide endurance is found at 87 KIAS in the T-34C. To provide for an adequate safety margin from stalls in the T-34 during power-off flight, 100 KIAS will always be used in the emergency landing pattern . 100 KIAS will also provide performance that is close to maximum glide endurance. Flying a consistent pattern is far more important than gaining an extra few seconds of glide endurance. GLIDE PERFORMANCE FACTORS You might fee~ a tendency to try to "stretch out" the glide by increasing the angle of attack. If the angle of attack is increased beyond UDMAXAOA, the horizontal distance the plane will travel will actually decrease. The minimum glide angle obtained at UDMAX will not produce the minimum sink rate, but will produce the greatest horizontal distance for a given altitude.

1.7-12

As the airplane's weight is increased, the T Rand PR curves shift up and to the right. The lowest point on each curve will shift as well, increasing the velocity at which it occurs. As long as the pilot maintains UDMAXAOA, the UD ratio and angle of descent remain constant. Therefore, an increase in weight will not affect maximum glide range. An increase in the velocity during a descent will cause the rate of descent to increase, and glide endurance to decrease. Increasing the weight will cause the airplane to fly faster and descend faster. but still glide the same distance. An increase in altitude will increase the maximum glide range and maximum glide endurance of an airplane (Figure 1.7-19) .

--

I

Figure 1.7-19 Altitude vs Glide

.

Flgure 1.7-20 Winds V8 Glide

Wind has the same effect on maximum glide range that it has on maximum range. Since a headwind decreases groundspeed, it causes a decrease in the maximum glide range. Conversely, a tailwind will increase the maximum glide range. Wind has no effect on rate of descent or on glide endurance (Figure 1.7-20). During power off flight, airplane configuration plays a major role in determining glide performance. If the pilot alters the configuration by opening the canopy. IT-34), or extending the landing gear and/or the flaps. the sink rate will increase and glide range will decrease. Some specific sink rates and glide ratios from theT-34 NATOPS Manual are listed below. By comparison, the glide ratio of the T-37 is approximately 13:1 (11 miles per 5,000 feet of altitude loss) for a clean configuration. Knowledge of these sink rates should assist the stUdent in understanding the practice/actual emergency landing patterns and assist in achieving the proper position in them (Table 1.7-1). The greatest effect of configuration on glide performance deals with the propeller. When you are in normal flight, the propeller blades are almost flat to the relative wind, but create no drag since the engine is driving the prop around. When the engine fails, if the propeller blades stay flat to the relative wind, the wind will drive the propeller blades around, called windmilling. Windmilling significantly increases the drag on the aircraft, and adversely affects glide performance. In order to stop the propeller from windmilling, you can turn the individual propeller blades so they are aligned with the wind. This is called feathering the propeller. From the chart below, you can see the importance of feathering the propeller in an actual engine failure. 1.7-13

AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION

PROP

SINK RATE at

GLIDE RATIO

FEATHERED

100 KIAS

at

GEAR FLAPS

100 KIAS

UP

UP

YES

800

12 to 1

DOWN

UP

YES

1,200

8 to 1

UP

DOWN

YES

1,250

8 to 1

DOWN

DOWN

YES

1,650

6 to 1

UP

UP

NO

2,400

3 to 1

Table 1.7-1 Sink Rate Comparison NOTE

The configurations shown include canopy closed, wings level and balanced flight. With both canopies open, the sink rate typically increases . by 300 fpm.

THE REGIONS OF NORMAL AND REVERSE COMMAND . Velocities above maximum endurance are referred to as the region of normal command . The region of normal command is characterized by airspeed stability. Assume an airplane is in equalibrium at point B (Figure 1.7-21 or Figure 1.7-22). A decrease in airspeed (for whatever reason) results in a thrust or power excess that will eventually accelerate the aircraft back to the original airspeed at point B. An increase in airspeed from point B (once again, for whetever reason) results in a thrust or power deficit that slows the aircraft back to the original airspeed. In the region of normal command, velocity and throttle setting for level flight are directly related. To fly in equilibrium at a faster airspeed, you need more TAlPA than you did at a slower airspeed. To fly slower, you need less TAlPA. Velocities below maximum endurance are referred to as the region of reverse command. The region of reverse command is characterized by airspeed instability. Assume an airplane is in equilibrium at point A (Figure 1.7-21 or Figure 1.7-22). A decrease in airspeed (for whatever reason) results in a thrust or power deficit that will eventually slow the aircraft to the point of stalling (assuming a level flight attitude is being maintained). An increase in airspeed (again, for whatever reason) from Point A results in a thrust or power excess that accelerates the aircraft away from point A, eventually reaching eqUilibrium at point B.

1.7-14

In the region of reverse command, velocity and throttle setting for level flight are inversely related. Once you are stabilized at a faster airspeed in equilibrium flight, your TAlPA will be lower than when you were stabilized at a slower airspeed. Simply stated, the slower you fly, the more thrust/power you need.

Normal Command

Reverse Command

Reverse

Normal

Command Command

9

.

UO,oW(

A"'~

Max Endurance

.....>........

B Max Endurance

VELOCIlY (TAS)

VELOCllY (TAB)

Figure 1.7-21 Jet Reverse Command

Figure 1.7-22 Prop Reverse Command

A complete knowledge of this flight region is particularly important because most aviation accidents occur while operating in the region of reverse command. Whenever an airplane is taking off or landing, it is flying in or near this region. A very dangerous situation for an inexperienced pilot is trying to slow down in the region of reverse command. If the pilot increases back pressure to increase angle of attack and decrease velocity, this will causes thrust or power required to increase which creates a deficit. Once the airspeed bleeds off, the deficit causes the airplane to descend. The young pilot tends to pull back on the control stick in order to keep from descending. This causes the airplane to move further into the region of reverse command which creates a greater deficit. Eventually the deficit will be so great that even full throttle is not able to overcome it. Since this usually occurs during landing, there is not enough altitude to recover. This is where we get the phrase "behind the power curve." An experienced pilot knows that in order to maintain level flight as an airplane slOWS down in the region of reverse command, the throttle must be increased. Increasing angle of attack will only aggravate the situation. T-37B final approaches are flown at airspeeds slightly above UDMAX airspeeds. A heavyweight no-flap approach (gear down, flaps down, no speedbrake) at 11 OKIAS comes the closest to UDMAX, therefore, it is critical not to get slow during this approach.

1.7-15

STUDY QUESTIONS Aircraft Performance

1.

What curves determine fuel flow for a turboprop and a turbojet?

2.

Define max endurance and max range.

3.

What performance profiles occur at UDMAX? A. Jet max range, prop max endurance B. Both jet and prop max range C. Prop max range, jet max endurance D. Both jet and prop max endurance

4.

What is the effect of weight on max endurance and max range? What happens to max endurance and max range AIRSPEED when weight is increased?

5.

What is the effect of altitude on max endurance and max range? What happens to max endurance and max range AIRSPEED when altitude is increased?

1.7-16

· 6.

What effect does a tailwind have on max range and max endurance? Their airspeeds?

7.

What effect does lowering the landing gear have on fuel flow at max endurance airspeed?

8.

Define max angle of climb.

9.

How do jets and props achieve max angle of climb? A. Full throttle, jets at UDMAX, props faster than UDMAX B. 85% throttle, jets at UDMAX, props slower than UDMAX C. Full throttle, jets faster than UDMAX, props at UDMAX D. Full throttle, jets at UDMAX, props slower than UDMAX

10.

Which statement is true conceming jet and prop climb performance? A. Jets will always climb faster than props B. Max rate of climb angle of attack is smaller than max angle of climb. C. Max angle of climb airspeed is faster than max rate of climb. D. Jets and props climb at the same angle of attack, but different airspeeds.

1.7-17

11. What profile should you fly to clear a tall obstacle on takeoff? What airspeed is this in the T-34 and T-37?

12.

How do altitude and weight changes affect max rate of climb and max angle of climb?

13.

The altitude where maximum power excess equals zero is called the ____'

14.

At what AOA and velocity would you achieve max glide endurance?

15.

Match the following terms. ' a.

Max glide endurance

b.

Max glide range

__ 1. Min angle of descent 2. Min rate of descent 3. Min sink rate __ 4. Max glide ratio

__ 5. VSEST

16.

At what AOA and velocity would you achieve max glide range?

1.7-18

17.

How do altitude, weight, and headwinds affect glide performance?

18.

From 10,000 feet AGL, approximately how far could a T-34 or T-37 glide with no winds?

A. 12 to 13 thousand feet B. 12 to 13 nautical miles C. 20 to 22 thousand feet D. 20 to 22 nautical miles

19.

What item of configuration will cause the greatest increase in sink rate?

20.

What are the throttle requirements in relation to airspeed in the region of reverse command?

A. Decrease in airspeed requires an increase in throttle B. Decrease in airspeed requires a decrease in throttle C. Increase in airspeed requires an increase in throttle D. Constant airspeed requires an increase in throttle.

21.

What is the effect of an increase in angle of attack with no change in throttle?

1.7-19

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.7-20

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Aircraft Control Systems Assignment Sheet No. 1.8.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding the controls of the T-34 and T-37. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.116

State the type of control system used in the T-34 or T-37.

1.117

Describe how the control surfaces respond to control inputs.

1.118

Describe how the trim tab system holds an airplane in trimmed flight.

1.119

State the T-34 trim requirements for various conditions of flight.

1.120

State the point around which control surfaces are balanced.

1.121

Define mass balancing and aerodynamic balancing.

1.122

State the methods of mass balancing and aerodynamic balancing used by each control surface on the T-34.

1.123

Describe how trim tabs can provide artificial feel.

1.124

State the purpose of bobweights and downsprings.

1.125

State the artificial feel devices used by each control surface on the T-34.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.8.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.8-1

INFORMATION SHEET Aircraft Control Systems Information Sheet No. 1.8.11 INTRODUCTION Control is how the pilot uses the control surfaces to initiate rotational motions and cause the airplane to move along a desired flight path. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots Chapter 18

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1) Section VI

4.

T -34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION CONTROL SYSTEMS To maneuver an airplane, the pilot must redirect the forces acting on the airplane. Control surfaces allow us to change the amount of lift of the airfoil to which they are attached. With our control surfaces we can create different airplane motions, such as yaw, pitch, and roll. CONTROL SURFACES The elevator is attached to the trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer, and controls the pitching moment around the airplane's eG. Moving the control stick forward causes the elevator to move down, forcing the tail of the airplane up and pitching the nose down. Some airplanes move the entire horizontal stabilizer. This is called a stabilator and is used on F-14s and F-15s. The ailerons are attached to the outboard trailing edges of the wings, and produce a rolling moment. Ailerons move in unison in opposite directions (Figure 1.8-1). If the control stick is pushed left, the left aileron rises, the right aileron lowers, and the plane rolls left. As long as the ailerons are deflected the airplane will continue to roll. When the stick is centered, the airplane will stop rolling, and remain at that bank angle until the stick is deflected again.

1.8-2

• . .. " • •

•

44

••

•

Figure 1.8-1 Aileron Operation

Spoilers may be attached to the wing's upper surface to provide roll control on some aircraft. Spoilers disrupt the airflow over the top of the wing in order to decrease the lift on the wing and cause the wing to roll downward. Spoilers may be used in conjunction with ailerons and/or stabilators. The rudder is attached to the trailing edge of the vertical stabilizer, and produces a yawing moment. Stepping on the right rudder pedal moves the rudder to the right, pushing the tail left and yawing the airplane's nose to the right. TRIM TABS Trim tabs are attached to the trailing edge of each control surface and have two functions. The primary purpose of trim tabs is to trim. Trimming reduces the force required to hold control surfaces in a position necessary to maintain a desired flight attitude. Trim allows the pilot to fly virtually hands off, momentarily freeing the pilot's hands for other tasks, such as tuning radios or folding charts. The second purpose of trim tabs is to provide artificial feel (discussed later in this lesson). If a pilot pulls back on the TRIM TAB control stick. the elevator is deflected FORCE up so that the nose of the airplane pitches up. The airflow around the horizontal stabilizer creates a downward force on the elevator (Figure 1.8-2) that acts at a distance (moment arm) from the hingeline. This creates a moment that tries to move the elevator back in line with the horizontal stabilizer. In order to keep the airplane's nose up, the pilot must ELEVATOR exert enough back pressure on the FORCE control stick to overcome the moment created by the elevator's force. By moving the trim tab in the opposite Figure 1.8·2 Trim Tab Operation direction as the control surface, a small force is created by the trim tab in the opposite direction. Since this small force has a greater moment arm. it creates a moment that exactly opposes the moment created on the elevator. Once the sum of the moments is zero, the elevator win remain in place until the pilot moves the control stick again. For trimming, trim tabs must always be moved in the opposite direction as the control surface. If a pilot moves a control away from its trimmed position. and then releases it. the trim tabs will cause the control surface to move back to its trimmed position. If the pilot moves the control surface and wants it to remain in place. he must re-trim it. A pilot can change the T-34's trim settings by adjusting the manual trim wheels on the trim control panel. Trim tabs for aileron and elevator on the T-37B are actuated by electric motors via a multi-position switch on the stick. Rudder trim is actuated by a rudder trim switch on the left consol 1.8-3

behind the throttles. Aileron trim in the T-34 is adjusted after takeoff and seldom requires further adjustment during flight. When the T-34's aileron trim tab wheel is adjusted, only the left aileron trim tab moves. The right aileron trim tab is preset by maintenance. T-34 rudder and elevator trim will be adjusted frequently during flight because they are sensitive to power and airspeed changes. Rudder trim compensates for prop wash and torque, which vary with power. Elevator trim will be adjusted to maintain various angles of attack while changing airspeed. Simply stated, right rudder trim is requ ired for power increases and slower airspeeds , while left rudder trim is required for power reductions and faster airspeeds (power changes take precedence at low speeds). Elevator trim is adjusted up at slower speeds and down at higher speeds (Figure 1.8-3). AIRSPEED

POWER

CONTROL BALANCING

The forces that act at the control surface's center of gravity and aerodynamic center must be balanced around the hingeline in LEFT RIGHT order to regulate control pressure. prevent control flutter. and provide control-free stability. Control-free is the situation where the controls are not being manipulated by the pilot (hands off). Aerodynamic balance concerns balancing UP the forces that act at the aerodynamic center. Mass balance concerns balancing the forces that act at the center of gravity. Figure 1.8-3 Rudder and Elevator Trim LEADING EDGE

Aerodynamic balance is used to keep control pressures (associated with higher velocities) within reasonable limits. As the trailing edge of the control surface is deflected in one direction. the leading edge deflects into the airstream forward of the hingeline (Figure 1.8-4). The force on the leading edge creates a moment that reduces the force required to deflect the control surface. so the pilot may control the airplane more easily. For aerodynamic balance. the T-34C and T378 uses shielded horns on the elevator and rudder, and an overhang on the ailerons (Figure 1.8-5).

\ HINGE UNE

CONTROl SURFACE

Figure 1.8-4 Aerodynamic Balance

1.8-4

The relationship of the control surface CG to the hingeline will determine the control-free stability of the airplane. Stability is more desirable in transport and bomber type airplanes and therefore the control surface CG is usually located forward of the hingeline. This keeps the control surface aligned with the fixed surface ahead of it when struck by gusts from turbulence. For high performance airplanes, the CG is located on or aft of the hingeline. With the CG aft of the hingeline, the control tends to float into the relative wind and cause a greater displacement which allows a faster response to control action and makes the airplane more maneuverable. To gain a balance between control response and stability, the T-34C control CGs are located on the hingeline. To locate the CG on the hingeline, weights are placed inside the control surface in the area forward of the hingeline (shielded hom and overhang). This technique is called mass balancing.

OVERHANG

UNBALANCED

FIXED

FIXED

SURFACE

SURFACE

OON'rRoLSURFACE

CONTROL SURFACE

SHIElDED HINGEUNE UNSHJ8..DED

r-_____H_O_R_N~\L

l~H=OR~N~__~ FIXED

AXED

SURFACE

SURFACE

Cotm=lOl,. SURFAOE

CONTROL SURFACE

Figure 1.8-5 Aerodynamic Balance DamoMtrated U.lng a Horizontal StablUzer

CONTROL FEEL There are several basic types of control systems used to move the control surfaces: conventional, power-boosted, full power (fly-by-wire). In conventional controls the forces applied to the stick and rudder pedals are transferred direct,y to the control surfaces via push-pull tubes, pulleys, cables and levers. If an external force moves the control surfaces, the stick or rudder pedal will move in the cockpit. This action is called reversibility and gives the pilot feedback. Feedback is the force that the pilot feels in his hands or feet for a given deflection of the stick or rudder pedals. Without feedback the pilot would tend to over control and possibly overstress the airplane. The T-34 and T-37 use conventional controls.

1.8-5

Power-boosted controls have mechanical linkages with hydraulic, pneumatic, or electrical boosters to assist the pilot in moving the controls in the same way power steering assists a car driver. The degree to which the controls are boosted varies depending upon the mission and design of the airplane. These systems have some reversibility, and the pilot receives some control feel through the cockpit controls. If the boost system fails, the pilot can still control the airplane, although the control forces will be greatly increased. With a full-power or fly-by-wire control system, the pilot has no direct connection with the control surfaces. The controls of a full power system are connected to hydraulic valves or electrical switches which control the movement of the control surfaces. The fly-by-wire system uses computer commands to displace the controls. These systems are not reversible. Movement of the control stick causes the control surfaces to move, but movement of the control surfaces will not cause the control stick to move. Since these systems are not reversible, they require an artificial means of producing control feel. Artificial feel is any device used to create or enhance control feedback under various flight conditions such as airspeed and acceleration changes.- The T-37B has no artificial feel and can be overstressed easily. The T-34C uses trim tabs, bobweights, and downsprings to provide artificial feel to the pilot. The T -34C aileron uses a servo trim tab to provide artificial feel. It moves in the opposite direction as the aileron, thus helping the pilot to deflect the aileron, and making the airplane easier to maneuver (Figure 1.8-6).

TRIMMED POSTION

c

Artificial feel is provided to the T-34C rudder by an anti-servo trim tab. When the rudder is displaced, the anti-servo tab moves in the same direction at a faster rate (Figure 1.87). Thus, the more that a rudder pedal is pressed, the greater the resistance that the pilot will feel.

Figure 1.8-6 Servo Trim Tab

FIgure 1.8-7 Anti-Servo Trim Tab

1.8-6

Because trim tabs do not provide the desired type of P0ST10N artificial feel, the T-34C elevator ~IZONTALSTA8IUZEA~ •• ···:..::.:t'::::~~ uses a neutral trim tab that maintains a constant angle to '!f pOsmON the elevator when the control ELEVATOR~ surface is deflected (Figure 1.8NEl11lW. ~/' 8). The elevator uses both a TRIMTAa bobweight and a downspring to provide the pilot with some artificial feel (Figure 1.8-9). The Figure 1.8-8 Neutral Trim Tab downspring increases the force required to pull the stick aft at low airspeeds when required control pressures are extremely light. The bobweight increases the force required to pull the stick aft during maneuvering flight. TRIMMED

DOWNSPR'NG

~

I·

I;

.; ."

ILLUSTRATION SHOWS ONLY i' EFFECT, NOT '. ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION

!:.t .! ... E -:.

I J~

:=:Z:=====::I:I::ZJ BO BWE IGHT

,

AXIS

Figure 1.8-9 Artificial Feel for the Elevator Historical Note The problem of balancing stability and maneuverability has been around since flight began. It is interesting to note that the Wright brothers fully recognized this problem . . They were the first to understand the need for positive roll control, such as ailerons . .The Wright brothers were the first to demonstrate the use of ailerons with rudder for producing a coordinated turn (no sideslip). Interestingly they made their airplanes highly maneuverable by designing them to be statically unstable. Since then, most airplanes have been statically stable and relatively easy to fly (once you get the hang of it).

1.8-7

STUDY QUESTIONS Aircraft Control Systems

1.

State the motion that each control surface creates.

2.

What control deflection is required to induce a nose-up pitching moment?

3.

What control deflection is required to induce a rolling moment to the right?

4.

What are the functions of the trim tabs? What elevator trim tab deflection is required to maintain equilibrium for a nose-up pitch attitude?

5.

What provides aerodynamic balance for the rudder and elevator of the T-34C or T-37B?

6.

What is used for aerodynamic balancing of the T-34C or T378 aileron?

1.8-8

7.

What is responsible for mass balancing on the elevator of the T-34C or T-37B?

8.

What type of controls does the T-34C or T-37B use? How do cockpit control inputs move the control surfaces?

9.

What type of trim tabs are used on the T-34C or T-37B aileron, elevator, and rudder? What type(s) assist the pilot?

10.

What is installed in the elevator system of the T-34C or T-37B and is responsible for increasing the amount of force required to move the stick aft?

1.8-9

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.8-10

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Stability Assignment Sheet No. 1.9.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding the stability of the T-34 and T-37. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.126

Define static stability and dynamic stability.

1.127

Identify the stability conditions of various systems based on their tendencies and motion.

1.128

Explain the relationship between stability and maneuverability.

1.129

State what may be done to increase an airplane's maneuverability.

1.130

Define longitudinal stability and neutral point.

1.131

Explain the contribution of straight wings, wing sweep, fuselage, horizontal stabilizer, and neutral point location to longitudinal static stability.

1.132

Define directional stability, sideslip angle, and sideslip relative wind.

1.133

Explain the contribution of straight wings, swept wings, fuselage, and vertical stabilizer to directional static stability.

1.134

Define lateral stability.

1.135

Explain the contribution of dihedral and anhedral wings, wing placement on the vertical axis, swept wings, and the vertical stabilizer to lateral static stability.

1.9-1

1.136

Describe directional divergence, spiral divergence, dutch roll, and phugoid motion.

1.137

State the stability conditions that produce directional divergence, spiral divergence, dutch roll, and phugoid motion.

1.138

Describe proverse roll, adverse yaw, and pilot induced oscillations.

1.139

Explain how pilot induced oscillations relate to the T-34C or T-378.

1.140

Describe the effects of asymmetric thrust, propeller slipstream swirl, Pfactor, torque, and gyroscopic precession as they apply to the T-34C or T37B.

1.141

Describe what must be done to compensate for asymmetric thrust, propeller slipstream swirl, P-factor, torque, and gyroscopic precession as they apply to the T-34C and T-378.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.9.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.9-2

INFORMATION SHEET Stability Information Sheet No. 1.9.11 INTRODUCTION The last few lessons have dealt mainly with weight, thrust and the production of lift and drag. All four of these forces are considered in equilibrium. During actual flight one or more of these forces may become unbalanced. Engineers design airplanes to possess varying degrees of stability in the three rotational axes. This lesson will examine stability from an engineering standpOint. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots Chapters 16 and 17

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1) Section VI, Diving, Abrupt control stick movement, longitudinal stability.

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

INFORMATION

TYPES OF STABILITY Stability is the tendency of an object (airplane) to return to its state of equilibrium once disturbed from it. There are two kinds of stability: static and dynamic. Static stability is the initial tendency of an object to move toward or away from its original equilibrium position. Dynamic stability is the position with respect to time, or motion of an object after a disturbance.

STATIC STABILITY If an object has an initial tendency toward its original equilibrium position after a disturbance, it is said to possess positive static stability. Consider a ball inside a bowl (Figure 1.9-1). The ball's equilibrium position is at the bottom of the bowl. If the ball is moved from this position toward the rim of the bowl, its initial tendency, when released, is to roll back toward the bottom of the bowl. It is therefore said to possess positive static stability.

1.9-3

POSITIVE STATIC STABIUTY

L

EQUllJ8RlUU

Figure 1.9-1 Positive Static Stability

NEGATIVE STATIC STABI UlY .

I

TENDENCY AWAY FAOM ECUIUBRIUM

\

Negative static stability is the initial tendency to continue moving away from equilibrium following a disturbance. Let's turn the bowl upside down and place the ball on top as in Figure 1.9-2. Observe the ball's new equilibrium position. If the ball is moved away from its equilibrium position and released, its initial tendency is to roll farther away from equilibrium. The ball exhibits negative static stability.

Figure 1.9-2 Negative Static Stability NEUTRAL STATIC STABILITY Neutral static stability is the initial tendency to accept the displacement position as a new equilibrium. If we place the ball on a flat surface, it is again in equilibrium. If it is moved away from its original spot, the ball adopts the new equilibrium position (Figure 1.9-3). It does not have a tendency to move toward or away from the original equilibrium position. The ball now demonstrates neutral static stability.

EQU1UBFIIUM ENCOUNTERED AT ANY POINT OF DISPLAceMENT

,

,

6- '0'+

/ '

EQUIUBRIUM

Figure 1.9-3 Neutral Static Stability

DYNAMIC STABILITY Static stability reveals nothing about whether the object ever settles back to its original equilibrium position. To study dynamic stability, we will first assume the object to possess positive static stability. Consider the ball in Figure 1.9-1. After it is released, we naturally expect it to roll back to the bottom and up the other side. It would roll back and forth, oscillating less and less about the equilibrium position until it finally came to rest at the bottom of the bowl. This object possesses positive dynamic stability. Note that although the ball passes through the equilibrium position, it is not in equilibrium again until it has stopped moving. The motion described is called a damped oscillation (Figure 1.9-4). 1.9-4

DAMPEO OSCILLATION

(POsmve STAiTO) (POsmve DYNAMIC) Figure 1.9-4 Positive StatiC/ Positive Dynamic Stability

UNDAMPED OSCILLATlON

If the ball oscillates about the equilibrium position and the oscillations never dampen out, it possesses neutral dynamic stability. Figure 1.9-5 depicts its displacement relative to eqUilibrium over time. This motion is called an undamped oscillation.

(POSITIVE STATIC) (NEt.ITJ:IAl 0YNAMl0)

Figure 1.9·5 Positive Static! Neutral Dynamic Stability

If, somehow, the ball did not slow down, but continued to climb to a higher and higher position with each oscillation, it would never return to its original equilibrium position. Figure 1.9-6 depicts negative dynamic stability. Obviously this motion is impossible with a ball, but occasionally aircraft behave this way. This motion is called a divergent oscillation.

DIVERGENT OSCILlATlON

Figure 1.9-6 Positive Staticl

Negative Dynamic Stability If an object does not have positive static stability, it cannot have positive dynamic stability. If an object has positive static stability, it can have any dynamic stability. In other words, static stability does not ensure dynamic stability, but static instability ensures dynamic instability. If an object is dynamically stable, the displacement from equilibrium will be reduced until the object is again at its original eqUilibrium. It must have both positive static and positive dynamic stability. If an object is dynamically unstable, the displacement mayor may not increase, but the object will never return to its original equilibrium. AIRPLANE STATIC STABILITY AND MANEUVERABILITY

Airplane stability is desirable because the airplane tends to stay in equilibrium. If an airplane were even slightly unstable, the pilot would have to spend most of the time keeping the airplane on the desired flight path. Most airplanes are built so that, even if the pilot has no hands on the controls, they will continue to fly themselves.

1.9-5

Equilibrium occurs when the sum of the forces and moments around the center of gravity (CG) are equal to zero. An aircraft in equilibrium will travel in a constant direction at a constant speed, developing no moments that would cause it to rotate around the CG. Since an airplane can rotate around three different axes, we must consider its stability around each of these axes. Longitudinal stability is stability of the longitudinal axis around the lateral axis (pitch). Lateral stability is stability of the lateral axis around the longitudinal axis (roll). Directional stability is stability of the longitudinal axis around the vertical axis (yaw). Each motion requires a separate discussion. We'll make some basic assumptions to simplify our study. First, we assume a constant TAS. The disturbances that cause the airplane to pitch, yaw, or roll wilfbe small enough that it does not affect the airplane's forward velocity. The disturbances will also be small enough to keep the change in pitch attitude, and degree of yaw and roll small enough so that we do not approach any stalling AOA's or unusual attitudes. These disturbances are external and not caused by the pilot. The pilot applies no inputs to correct the displacement from equilibrium. Any moment that corrects the airplane's attitude results from the design of the airplane. Any discussion of airplane stability requires an explanation on how the wings, fuselage, vertical stabilizer, horizontal stabilizer, etc, affect the longitudinal, lateral, and directional stability of the airplane. You should understand why the wings are shaped a particular way, why the tail is where it is, and why the vertical stabilizer is as big as it is. We will look primarily at conventional type airplanes, that is, airplanes with their wings, fuselage, and tails in their normal positions. An airplane's maneuverability is the ease with which an airplane will move out of its equilibrium position. Obviously, maneuverability and stability are opposites. A stable airplane tends to stay in equilibrium and is difficult for the pilot to move out of equilibrium. The more maneuverable an airplane is, the easier it departs from equilibrium, and the less likely it is to return to equilibrium. There are two ways to increase an airplane's maneuverability. If we want an airplane to move quickly from its trimmed equilibrium attitude, we can give it weak stability. Of course, this means the airplane will be more difficult to fly in equilibrium and will require more of the pilot's attention. Our other option is to give the airplane larger control surfaces. If the control surfaces are large, they can generate large moments by producing greater aerodynamic forces. The airplane designer must decide how to compromise between stability and maneuverability. The mission of a specific airplane dictates the compromises the designer will have to make. A transport plane must be relat!vely stable for long range flights and ease in landing. A fighter must possess great maneuverability for high performance turning.

1.9-6

LONGITUDINAL STATIC STABILITY Now that we have a basic understanding of static stability, we can discuss each component and its individual contribution to static stability. Afterwards, we'll combine all the components and discuss the overall static stability of the airplane. THE FLYING WING MODEL Each individual component may have its own aerodynamic center, and thus its own effect on static stability. These individual components create moments around the CG of our airplane that can be either stabiliZing or destabilizing. To examine stability in greater detail, we'll first take a Simplified approach using a "flying wing" model. By choosing the flying wing we have essentially eliminated the stability effect of any component except the wing itself. An airplane experiences four main forces in , equilibrium flight: lift, weight, drag, and thrust. Recall that these forces act around the center of gravity. For our discussion of longitudinal stability we only need to address lift and weight. Figure 1.9-7 shows these two forces in equilibrium on our airplane. Notice in Figure 1.9-7 that lift is acting through the aerodynamic center (AC), which is at a distance from our CG. This creates a moment around the CG. It should be understood that our flying wing in Figure 1.9-7 is in equilibrium, and that trim devices are preventing the wing from rotating to a nose-down attitude.

AEROOYNAIi&lC CENTER

FlElATlVE WINO

.

Figure 1.9-7 Flying Wing Model

Let's examine how the flying wing reacts to a disturbance that increases the AOA sensed by the airfoil. The increased ADA will increase lift. If the CG is ahead of the AC, the increase in lift at the AC develops a moment that pitches the nose of the airplane down in the direction of its original equilibrium ADA. Our flying wing has positive longitudinal static stability because of its initial tendency to return to equmbrium (Figure 1.9-8 . We can generalize this and say that if a component's aerodynamic center is behind the airplane's center of gravity the component will be a positive contributor to longitudinal static stability. 1.9-7

OCVo""l '/MD

'WElOkT

Figure 1.9-8 Positive Longitudinal Static Stability

Figure 1.9-9 Negative Longitudinal Static Stability

Next examine the flying wing when the AC is ahead of the CG. When the disturbance increases AOA, the wing produces more lift and rotates the flying wing further away from equilibrium (Figure 1.9-9). You can see that any disturbance would soon lead to stall and possibly out of control flight. We can generalize this and say that if a component's aerodynamic center is in front of the airplane's center of gravity the component will be a negative contributor to longitudinal static stability.

STRAIGHT WINGS The wing's contribution to longitudinal static stability depends mainly on the location of the wing's AC with respect to the airplane's CG. Most airplanes have straight wings with the AC forward of the airplane's CG. Like the second flying wing example, having the AC forward of the CG causes longitudinal static instability. The wings of most conventional airplanes are negative contributors to longitudinal static stability. Figure 1.9-10 illustrates the location of the wing's AC and the airplane's CG.

Figure 1.9-10 Straight Wings

1.9-8

WING SWEEP When an F-14's wings are swept forward, they have a strong longitudinally destabilizing effect. This is because the wing's AC is well forward of the airplane's CG. This increases the F-14's maneuverability. As sweep angle increases (wings move aft), the wings' AC moves aft, closer to the airplane's CG (Figure 1.9-11), making the airplane more longitudinally stable. Sweeping the wings back is a positive contributor to longitudinal static stability.

AC moves aft as the win.as sweep aft. ItItilUzlng the aircraft JongltudlrlallY.

Figure 1.9·11 Wing Sweep' THE FUSELAGE The fuselage is an airfoil and thus produces lift. The fuselage's AC is usually located ahead of the airplane's CG (Figure 1.9-12). If a disturbance causes an increase in angle of attack, the fuselage will produce greater lift that produces a . destabilizing effect. The fuselage is a negative contributor to longitudinal stability.

Rgure 1.9-12 Fuselage

THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER The horizontal stabilizer is a symmetric airfoil designed to stabilize the airplane around the lateral axis. Its Moment Between Horizontal contribution to longitudinal static stability is StabllLt8r and Center of Gravlty determined by the moment it produces around the CG. Since its AC is well behind the airplane's CG (Figure 1.9-13), the horizontal stabilizer will have the greatest positive effect on longitudinal static stability. The pitching moment can be increased by Figure 1.9-13 Horizontal Stabilizer increasing the distance between the airplane's CG and the stabilizer's AC, or by enlarging the horizontal stabilizer. Thus, for a short airplane, you need a large horizontal stabilizer. For an airplane with a longer moment arm, a smaller horizontal stabilizer will suffice.

1.9-9

THE NEUTRAL POINT The longitudinal static stability provided by the horizontal stabilizer must overcome the instabilities of the wings and fuselage in order to produce a stable airplane. Figure 1.9-14 shows the AC for each individual component. The neutral AIRCRAFT HORIZONTAl. point (NP) is the location of the FUSElAGE C.G. STABIUZER A.c. center of gravity, along the A.C. longitudinal axis, that would provide neutral longitudinal static stability. It can be thought of as the Figure 1.9-14 AC for Each Component aerodynamic center for the entire airplane. The location of the NP is fixed on conventional airplanes, but we can change the ,location of the CG by moving around cargo or mounting ordnance and fuel in various locations. As the CG is moved aft, the airplane's static stability decreases. The NP defines the farthest aft CG position without negative stability. Once the CG is aft of the NP the airplane becomes unstable and the pilot may have difficulty controlling it in flight. The neutral point does not determine the contribution of individual components, but rather determines the longitudinal stability of the overall airplane. NOTE: The T-37B is longitudinally unstable at velocities above 250 KIAS.

DIRECTIONAL STATIC STABILITY Directional static stability is stability of the longitudinal axis around the vertical axis. When an airplane yaws, its momentum keeps it moving along its original flight path for a short time. This condition RELAllVE is known as a sideslip. The angle WIND between the longitudinal axis and the relative wind is called the SIDBJP RElATIVE sideslip angle (~) (Figure 1.9-15). WIND The component of the relative wind that is parallel to the lateral axis is called the sideslip relative wind. Reaction to the sideslip will determine a component's contribution to directional Figure 1.9-15 Sideslip Angle static stability. We will examine the effects of the wings, wing sweep, fuselage, and the vertical stabilizer on directional static stability.

1.9-10

STRAIGHT WINGS During a sideslip, the advancing wing on a straight winged airplane has a momentary increase in airflow velocity as it moves forward. This increases parasite drag on that wing and pulls it back to its equilibrium position. The retreating wing has less velocity and less parasite drag , which helps to bring the nose back into the relative wind. Therefore, straight wings have a small positive effect on directional static stability. SWEPT WINGS The swept design of a wing will further increase directional stability. The advancing wing not only experiences an increase in Induced and parasite drag, but also an increase par.asite drag are in induced drag due to the greater on the increased chordwise flow. upwind wing Remember that lift and induced drag are produced by the wings when air flows chordwise over them. The retreating wing experiences more spanwise flow. Figure 1.9-16 Swept Wings Figure 1.9-16 depicts this phenomenon with the left wing experiencing greater induced and parasite drag. The result is an airplane that comes back into the relative wind. .

THE FUSELAGE The fuselage is a symmetric airfoil with its aerodynamic center forward of the airplane's eG. At zero angle of attack or zero sideslip it produces no net lift. When the airplane enters a sideslip, an angle of attack is created on the fuselage. The lift produced at the fuselage AC pulls the nose away from the relative wind, thus causing an increase in the sideslip angle. Therefore, the fuselage is a negative contributor to the airplane's directional static stability (Figure 1.9-1 7).

LIFT

RELAnve WIND

Figure 1.9-17 Fuselage

1.9-11

THE VERTICAL STABILIZER The vertical stabilizer is the greatest positive contributor to the directional static stability of a conventionally designed airplane. The vertical stabilizer is a symmetric airfoil mounted far behind the airplane's CG. A sideslip causes the vertical stabilizer to experience an increased angle of attack. This creates a horizontal lifting force on the stabilizer that is multiplied by the moment arm distance to the airplane's CG (Figure 1.9-18). The moment created will swing the nose ofthe airplane back into the relative Figure 1.9-18 Vertical Stabilizer wind. This is identical to the way a weather-vane stays oriented into the wind. There is an inverse relationship between tail size and moment arm length. The smaller the distance to the CG, the larger the vertical stabilizer must be and vice versa. It is not always desirable to have a large vertical stabilizer because of limited storage room aboard aircraft carriers and the large radar signatures. Designers often use two or more smaller vertical stabilizers (A-10, F-14, F15, F/A-18, and E-2), to accomplish the same stability effects as one large stabilizer. LA TERAL STATIC STABILITY

Lateral stability is stability of the IiOFUZOHTAI. ~ COMPONE.NT OF lateral axis around the longitudinal axis. 1"- UFT CAUSING An airplane has lateral stability if, after sloesUp some disturbance causes it to roll, it , RlLATIVE generates forces and moments that tend to reduce the bank angle and restore the WIND CUETO airplane to a wings level flight condition. 81DESUP When an airplane rolls, the lift vector points to the inside of the turn, reducing the vertical component of lift. Since weight still acts downward with the same force (Figure 1.9-19), the plane descends. The horizontal component of lift pulls the airplane to the side, thus creating a sideslip relative wind. This Figure 1 .9..19 Sideslip Relative Wind sideslip relative wind acts on the various components of the airplane causing stability or instability.

!

1.9-12

DIHEDRAL EFFECT When an airplane is laterally sideslipping, dihedral wings cause an increase in angle of attack and lift on the down-going wing. The up-going wing has a reduced angle of attack and a decrease in lift (Figure 1.9-20). This difference in lift creates a rolling moment that rights the airplane and stops the sideslip. Wings that are straight have neutral lateral static stability. Dihedral wings are the greatest positive contributors to lateral static stabilitv. Anhedral wings are the greatest negative contributors to lateral static stability.

aa:REASB')

UFT

.NCRE.ASEn . UFT

Figure 1.9-20 Dihedral WIngs

WING PLACEMENT ON THE VERTICAL AXIS During a sideslip the fuselage of a high-winged airplane impedes the airflow generated by the sideslip. This increases the upwash at the wing root on the downgoing wing which increases the AOA and lift. The up-going wing receives downwash which decreases the AOA, and lift. The lift imbalance rolls the airplane back to wings level. A low-mounted wing has the opposite effect. Thus, a high mounted wing is a positive contributor. and a low mounted wing is a! negative contributor to lateral static stability (Figure 1.9-21).

Figure 1.9-21 High and Low Mounted Wings 1.9-13

WING SWEEP Another way that we can affect lateral stability is to sweep the wings aft. As an airplane begins to sideslip in the direction of roll, the wing toward the sideslip has more chordwise flow than the wing away from the sideslip (Figure 1.9-22). The wing toward the sideslip (the lower wing) generates more lift, which levels the wings. Swept wings are laterally stabilizing. Remember, these effects are cumulative. Highmounted, swept dihedral wings are much more stable than low-mounted, straight wings with the same amount _ of dihedral.

Figure 1.9-22 Wing Sweep

THE VERTICAL STABILIZER The only other major effect-on lateral stability comes from the vertica~ stabilizer. When in a lateral sideslip, the vertical stabilizer senses an angle of attack, so it produces lift. Since the tail is above the airplane's center of gravity, this lift produces a moment that tends to right the airplane (Figure 1.9-23).

Agure 1 .9·23 Vertical Stabilizer DYNAMIC STABILITY Our discussion thus far has centered on static stability. When we discuss dynamic stability, we must realize that lateral and directional stability are interrelated. This interrelationship is called cross-coupling. The motions of an airplane are such that a rolling motion causes a yawing motion and vice versa. This cross-coupling between directional static stability and lateral static stability causes several dynamic effects including spiral divergence, dutch roll, proverse roll, and adverse yaw.

1.9-14

DIRECTIONAL DIVERGENCE Directional divergence is a condition of flight in which the reaction to a small initial sideslip results in an increase in sideslip angle (Figure 1.9-24). Directional divergence is caused by negative directional static stability. If the vertical stabilizer becomes ineffective for some reason (battle damage, mid-air collision), directional divergence could cause out of control flight. Most airplanes have very strong directional stability to prevent this from occurring.

Directional Divergence Negative Directional Airplane may yaw broedsIde to 1he wtnd.

Spiral Divergence Strong Directional Weak Lateral

Disturbance (sideslip) Bank angle 1ncreae8,

C8U81ng glMter ..cte.Ip.

Undisturbed

Figure 1.9-24 Directional and Spiral Divergence SPIRAL DIVERGENCE Spiral divergence occurs when an airplane has strong directional stability and weak lateral stability (Figure 1.9-24). For example, an airplane is disturbed so that Its wing dips and starts to roll to the left. Because the airplane has weak lateral stability it cannot correct itself and the flight path arcs to the left. The airplane senses a new relative wind from the left and aligns itself with the new wind by yawing into it (strong directional stability). The right wing is now advancing and the increased airflow causes the airplane to roll even more to the left. The airplane will continue to chase the relative wind and will develop a tight descending spiral. This is easily corrected by control input from the pilot.

1.9-15

DUTCH ROLL Dutch roll is the result of strong lateral stability and weak directional stability. The airplane responds to a disturbance with both roll and yaw motions that affect each other. For example, a gust causes the airplane to roll left, producing a left sideslip. The strong lateral stability increases lift on the left wing and corrects it back to wings level. At the same time, the nose of the airplane yaws left into the sideslip relative wind. This leaves the airplane wings level, with the nose cocked out to the left. The weak directional stability now swings the nose to the right to correct the nose back into the relative wind. This causes the left wing to advance faster than the right wing, which produces more lift on the left wing and rolls the airplane to the right, creating a right sideslip. The strong lateral stability corrects the wings back to level, while the nose yaws right into the sideslip relative wind. This leaves the airplane wings level, with the nose cocked out to the right. As the nose yaws left into the relative wind, the wings will roll left which starts the entire process again.

Dutch Roll \~

strong Lateral Weak Directional

Disturbance

Undisturbed

Figure 1.9-25 Dutch Roll

The airplane appears to be "tail wagging" (Figure 1.9-25). This condition can be tolerated and may eventually dampen out. However, it is not acceptable in a fighter or· attack airplane when the pilot is trying to aim at a target. PHUGOID OSCILLATIONS Phugoid oscillations are long period oscillations (20 to 100 seconds) of altitude and airspeed while maintaining a nearly constant angle of attack. Oscillations of pitch attitude do occur, but are often minor. Upon being struck by an upward gust, an airplane would gain altitude and lose airspeed. A large but gradual change in altitude and airspeed occurs. When enough airspeed is lost, the airplane will nose-over slightly, commencing a gradual descent, gaining airspeed and losing altitude. When enough airspeed is regained, the nose will pitch up, starting the process over. The period of this oscillation is long enough that the pilot can easily correct it. Often, due to the almost negligible changes in pitch, the pilot may make the necessary corrections while being completely unaware of the oscillation. PILOT I AIRPLANE INTERACTION We have discussed how an airplane's stability characteristics react to various external forces. We must also consider the interaction of the pilot and the airplane.

1.9-16

PROVERSE ROLL Proverse roll is the tendency of an airplane to roll in the same direction as it is yawing. When an airplane yaws, the yawing motion causes one wing to advance and the other wing to retreat. This increases the airflow on the advancing wing and decreases airflow over the retreating wing. A difference in lift is created between the two wings, and the airplane rolls in the same direction as it yawed. Proverse roll is even more pronounced on swept wing airplanes since the advancing wing will have more chordwise flow and will produce more lift. ADVERSE YAW Adverse yaw is the tendency of an airplane to yaw away from the direction of aileron roll input. When an airplane rolls, it has more lift on the up-going wing than on the down-going wing. This causes an increase in induced drag on the up-going wing that will retard that wing's forward motion and cause the nose to yaw in the opposite direction of the roll. The aircraft produces adverse yaw each time the ailerons are deflected (rolling into and out of a turn-). We can do three things to overcome this problem. The first method is to use spoilers instead of ailerons. The spoiler is deflected into the airstream from the upper surface of the wing. This spoils the airflow and reduces lift, causing the airplane to roll. The spoiler increases the parasite drag on the down-going wing, offsetting the induced drag on the up-going wing and helps reduce or eliminate adverse yaw. The second method is to use a rudder input to offset adverse yaw. The third is actually a design method of building the aircraft with differential ailerons. PILOT INDUCED OSCILLATIONS Pilot induced oscillations (Pia) are short period oscillations of pitch attitude and angle of attack. PIO or porpoising occurs when a pilot is trying to control airplane oscillations that happen over approximately the same time span as it takes to react. For example, a gust of wind causes the nose to pitch up. The natural longitudinal stability of . the airplane will normally compensate. However, if the pilot tries to push the nosedown, his input may coincide with the stability correction, causing the nose to over correct and end up low. The pilot then pulls back on the stick causing the nose to be high again. Since the short period motion of PIO is of relatively high frequency, the amplitude of the pitching could reach dangerous 'eve's in a very short time. If PIO is encountered , the pilot must rely on the inherent stability of the airplane and immediately release the controls, jf altitude permits. If not. "freeze" the stiok slightly aft of neutral. The T-34C and T-378 are not subject to this type of oscillation since it does not have strong longitudinal static stability.

1.9-17

ASYMMETRIC THRUST Any airplane with more than one engine can have directional DRAG \\.' control problems if one engine THRUST fails (Figure 1.9-26). This is known as asymmetric thrust. If an airplane with its engines located out on the wings, such as an S-3 Viking, E-2 Hawkeye or KC-10 Extender, has an engine failure, the thrust from the operating engine(s) will create a yawing moment toward the dead engine. This can happen even if the engines are relatively close, such as the F-14 or T-37B. The farther from the longitudinal axis that the Figure 1.9-26 Asymmetric Thrust engines are located, the greater the moment created by the operating engine. The yawing motion may be sufficient to cause proverse roll. Full opposite rudder may be required to compensate for the yawing moment, while opposite aileron should be used to correct the proverse roll. Every multiengine airplane has a minimum directional control speed that must be flown to ensure maximum effectiveness of the vertical stabilizer following an engine failure.

... \

oJ

SLIPSTREAM SWIRL The propeller imparts a corkscrewing motion to the· air called the slipstream swirl. This corkscrewing air flows_ around the fuselage until it reaches the vertical stabilizer where it increases the AOA on the vertical stabilizer (Figure 1.9-27). When a propeller driven airplane is at a high power setting and low airspeed (Le., takeoff), the increased angle of attack creates a horizontal lifting force that pulls the tail to the right and causes the nose to yaw left. Right rudder and lateral control stick inputs are required to compensate for slipstream swirl. Figure 1.9-27 Propeller Slipstream Swirl

1.9-18

P-FACTOR ROTA'TlON RELATlVE WINO

~

OOWN-GOlNG BLADE

i

DOWN

FR~ ~'fm

AIRSTREAM RELATI'IE WIND

~

. I·

I

~

Aota1lon ReJallYll Wind

GOING lLADE

ROTA'TlON ' RELATlVE

WINO

Figure 2.8-28 Propeller Side View

UP-GOING

BLAOE

Fro Ail'!ltllum ~ ~Wincl

Figure 1.9-29 Relative Wind

Propeller factor (P-factor) is the yawing moment caused by one prop blade creating more thrust than the other. The angle at which each blade strikes the relative wind will be different. causing a different amount of thrust to be produced by each blade. For practical purposes, only the up-going and down-going blades are considered. If the relative wind is above the thrust line, the up-going propeller blade on the left side creates more thrust since it has a larger angle of attack with the relative wind. This will yaw the nose to the right (Figure 1.9-28 and Figure 1.9-29). Note that this right yaw will result at high airspeeds (above 150 knots for the T-34C) due to the slight nose-down attitude required in level fli ght. If the relative wind is below the thrust line, such as in flight near the stall speed, the down-going blade on the right side will create more thrust and will yaw the nose to the left. There are two basic requirements for P-factor to have a noticeable effect: (1) The engine must be set to a high power condition, and (2) The thrust axis must be displaced from the relative wind. Since. airplane designers want Pfactor to be minimized during the majority of flight, they align the thrust axis with the relative wind for cruise airspeeds. Thus. P-factor will be most prevalent at AOA's significantly different from cruise AOA. such as very high speed level or descending flight, and high angle of attack climbs.

1.9-19

TORQUE Torque is a reactive force based on Newton's Third Law of Motion. A force must be applied to the propeller to cause it to rotate clockwise. A force of equal magnitude, but opposite direction, is produced which tends to roll the airplane's fuselage counterclockwise. The T -34C uses the elevator trim tabs to compensate for torque. If the elevator trim is set to zero , the left trim tab is approximately 4.5 0 down from the elevator, while the right trim tab is approximately 4.5 0 up from the elevator. A turbojet aircraft will not experience torque from its engines. Jet engines do not push against the airframe in order to rotate, they rest on bearings and push against the airflow to rotate. The torque in a turboprop is applied through its gearbox, not its engine. GYROSCOPIC PRECESSION Gyroscopic precession is based on the properties of spinning objects. When a force is applied to the rim of a spinning object (such as a. propeller), parallel to the axis of rotation, a resultant force is created in the direction of the applied force, but occurs 90 0 ahead in the direction of rotation. Pitching the nose of the T-34 up produces an applied force acting forward on the bottom of the propeller disk (or backward on the top of the disk). The resultant force would act 90 0 ahead in the direction of propeller rotation (clockwise), and cause the T-34 to yaw right. Although the. effect is less pronounced, the T-37 experiences gyroscopic precession from its engine compressors and turbines. The engines rotate counter-clockwise so pitching the nose up will tend to yaw the T-37 to the left. Gyroscopic precession often plays a large roll.in determining an airplane's entry characteristics into a spin.

1.9-20

STUDY QUESTIONS

Stability

1.

Define static and dynamic stability.

2.

What is the characteristic stability of divergent oscillation?

3.

What is the relationship between stability and maneuverability?

4.

What motion does longitudinal stability concern?

5.

How do the fuselage, horizontal stabilizer, wing, wing sweep, and location of the CG affect the longitudinal stability of an airplane?

6.

What effect does increasing wing sweep angle have on the location of the wing's aerodynamic center?

1.9-21

7.

What factors determine the magnitude of the contribution of the horizontal stabilizer to longitudinal stability?

8.

Define sideslip angle.

9.

What motion does directional stability concern?

10.

How do the fuselage, straight wing, swept wing, and vertical stabilizer affect directional stability of an airplane?

11.

What motion does lateral stability concern?

12.

How do swept wings, dihedral, anhedral, high or low mounted wings, and the vertical stabilizer affect lateral static stability?

13.

What tYpes of stability are associated with directional divergence, spiral divergence, and dutch roll?

1.9-22

14.

What is the tendency of an airplane to yaw away from the direction of roll? What causes it?

15.

What is the tendency of an airplane to roll into the direction of a yaw? What causes it?

16.

What must be done to achieve zero sideslip in case of an asymmetric thrust condition?

17.

If the relative wind is below the thrust line, which blade will produce more thrust, the down-going or up-going blade? Why? Which way will the nose of the airplane yaw?

18.

If the PCl is suddenly pushed forward, the T-34C will tend to roll to the _____ due to an increase in . If the nose of the airplane is suddenly pushed down, gyroscopic precession will tend to yaw the T-34C to the

1.9-23

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.9-24

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Spins Assignment Sheet No. 1.10.A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding the aerodynamic characteristics of spins and spin recovery. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.142

Define spin and autorotation.

1.143

Identify the factors that cause a spin.

1.144

Identify the effects of weight, pitch attitude, and gyroscopic effect on spin entry.

1.145

Describe the angles of attack and forces on each wing that cause autorotation during a spin.

1.146

State the characteristics and cockpit indications of normal and inverted spins.

1.147

Identify the effects of control inputs on spin recovery.

1.148

State how the configuration of the empennage and placement of the horizontal control surfaces can affect spin recovery.

1.149

Describe the steps in the spin prevention procedure for the T -37 and the spin recovery procedures for the T-34 and T-37.

1.150

Define progressive and aggravated spin. 1.10-1

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.10.11 and answer thE Study Questions.

1.10-2

INFORMATION SHEET Spins Information Sheet 1.10.11

INTRODUCTION In the early days of aviation, a spin usually ended in a fatality. Aerodynamic theory had not advanced to the point of being able to explain a spin or determine the proper recovery techniques. Even today, the word SPIN has an aura of danger and the unknown. However, if you have an understanding of spins, your apprehension will be measurably reduced. Once spins were understood, nearly all pilots have practiced recovering from them. The spin itself, though, has no practical value as a maneuver. There are at least three sound reasons for teaching spins to student pilots. First, virtually every aircraft that is capable of stalling has the potential for entering a.spin . In most high performance aircraft, many maneuvers are flown near the stall region, making it essential to train aircrews to recognize the conditions leading to spins, applying appropriate spin recovery procedures, and learning to respect spins without fearing them. Second, spin training will build confidence in your ability to handle your aircraft should you inadvertently enter a spin. Third, spin training improves your ability to remain oriented and still make appropriate control inputs. Every aircraft has different spin characteristics and recovery techniques. Therefore, you must know the flight manual procedures for spin prevention and recovery for the aircraft you are flying. We will go over general spin characteristics and specific indications-of a spin along with spin prevention/recovery steps for the T-34 and T-37.

REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators, Chapter 4,

2.

ATCP 51-3, Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapter 19, Spins

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft, (T.O.1T-37B-1), Section VI, Spins

4.

AETCM 3-3, Volume 2, Chapter 5, Section D

5.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

1.10-3

INFORMATION SPIN AERODYNAMICS A spin is an aggravated stall that results in autorotation. Autorotation is a combination of roll and yaw that propagates itself and progressively gets worse due to asymmetrically stalled wings. For an aircraft to spin, it must be stalled and some form of yaw must be introduced. If an aircraft is not stalled, it will not spin. If either the stall or yaw is removed, the aircraft will not continue to spin . A yawing moment can be induced with the rudder, by adverse yaw, gust wing loading, etc. If a stalled condition is maintained long enough, sufficient yaw to enter a spin could eventually be introduced. To help you understand the aerodynamics of the spin let us first look at the motions an aircraft undergoes during a spin. Every aircraft exhibits different spin characteristics, however, they all have stall and yaw about the spin axis. For the T-34 and the T -37, the spin axis is through the cockpit. Examine the AOA and relative wind on each wing (Figure 1.10-1 and 1.10-2). Suppose the airplane stalls and begins a roll to the left. The left wing becomes the down-going wing and senses a roll relative wind from beneath. This roll relative wind is added to the existing relative wind and creates an average relative wind that is further from the chordline. Therefore, the down-going wing has a higher ADA. This wing is more stalled. Conversely, the right wing becomes the upgoing wing and senses a roll relative wind from above. When added to the original relative wind, the up-going wing has a lower AOA and is less stalled. Remember that while both wings are stalled, they do not lose all their lift, nor are they equally stalled. AOLL

RELATIVE WIND UP-OOINQ

WINO

Figure 1.10-1 Roll Relative Wind

1.10-4

The increased ADA on the down-going wing decreases the CL generated by that wing. The up-going wing has a greater C L due to its smaller ADA, and therefore has greater total lift. The greater total lift on the up-going wing results in a continued rolling motion of the airplane. The down-going wing has a higher Co due to its increased AOA. The greater drag on the down-going wing results in a continued yawing motion in the direction of roll. The combined effects of roll and yaw cause the airglane to continue its autorotation (Figure 1.10-2).

,

,

rv

/ 1

I'\,

V

Fv Y

V ~

J

I

~L I /I~ '

I

1

,

v

J

i\

/

..,.

~....

V

""

! "

i

Figure 1.10-2 CL and CD SPIN INDICATIONS The T-37 and T-34 will spin either erect (upright) or inverted. Erect spins result from positive-g stall entries. Inverted spins can occur from either a negative-g stall or an improperly applied recovery from an erect spin that results in a negative-g stall. The type of spin is not dependent upon aircraft attitude at the time of the stall. In case of special disorientation during a spin, the pilot must be aware of what the cockpit instrument spin indications are for each type of spin. The instruments that can be scanned to confirm that you are in an actual spin are the turn needle, altimeter, AOA indicator (if available), and airspeed indicator. The turn needle is the only reliable indicator of spin direction. The balance ball (slip indicator) gives no useful indication of spin direction and should be disregarded crable 1.10-1 .and 1.10-2).

T -34C INDICATIONS OF AN ERECT SPIN (characterized by nose-down, upright attitude, and positive g's) GAUGE

SPIN INDICATIONS

ALTIMETER

Rapidly decreasing

AIRSPEED AOA TURN NEEDLE VSI Attitude gyro

REMARKS

May indicate up to 1000 ft above actual altitude. 80-100 kts. Stable 30 units (pegged) Stalled Pegged in direction of spin Spin rate: 110-170° per sec. 6000 fpm indo (pegged) 9000-12000 fpm. Gyro may be tumbling 45° nose-down

Table 1.10-1 T-34C Erect Spin Indications 1.10-5

T -378 INDICATIONS OF AN ERECT SPIN (characterized by nose-down, upright attitude, and positive 9'5) GAUGE

SPIN INDICATIONS

ALTIMETER AIRSPEED

Rapidly decreasing 30-50 kts.

TURN NEEDLE

Pegged in direction of spin

WI Attitude gyro

6000 fpm ind . (pegged) Gyro may be tumbling

REMARKS Lose about 550 ft per tum May be 80-90 kts if in an accelerated spin. 0 Spin rate: 125 per sec. (3 sec per tum) .. About 11000 fpm 0 40-45 nose low

Table 1.10-2 T-378 Erect Spin Indications An inverted spin is characterized by an inverted attitude and negative gls on the airplane. Stabilized inverted spins are uncommon because the positioning of the vertical stabilizer in this spin causes the airplane to recover easily. Inverted spins are very disorienting to the aircrew and difficult to enter. The T-34 and T-37 are prohibited from doing intentional inverted spins (Table 1.10-3 and Table 1.10-4).

T -34C INDICATIONS OF AN INVERTED SPIN (characterized by nose-down, upside down attitude, and negative gls) REMARKS

GAUGE

SPIN INDICATIONS

ALTIMETER

Rapidly decreasing

AIRSPEED AOA TURN NEEDLE VSI Attitude gyro Accelerometer

Zero 2 to 3 units 0 Pegged in direction of spin Spin rate: 140 per sec. 6000 ft ind o(pegged) 8700 fpm 0 Gyro may be tumbling 25 nose-down 1 negative g

May indicate up to 1000 ft above actual altitude Stable

Table 1.10-3 T-34C Inverted Spin Indications

1.10-6

T -378 INDICATIONS OF AN INVERTED SPIN (characterized by nose-down, upside down attitude, and negative g's) GAUGE

SPIN INDICATIONS

ALTIMETER AIRSPEED TURN NEEDLE

Rapidly decreasing About 60 kts Pegged in direction of spin 6000 fpm ind. (pegged) Gyro may be tumbling 1.1 negative g's

WI Attitude gyro Accelerometer

REMARKS Lose about 550 ft per turn Spin rate:stabilized-125°Isec accelerated-180-220°Isec 12400 fpm

Table 1.10-4 T-37B Inverted Spin Indications A flat spin is characterized by a flat attitude and transverse or "eyeball out" g's. Since the relative wind is from directly below the airplane, the control surfaces are ineffective. The cockpit indications will be similar to an erect spin, except airspeed may vary depending on how flat the spin is. The T-34 and T-37 will not enter a flat spin. SPIN CHARACTERISTICS During a spin, the control surfaces continue to generate forces and affect the way in which an aircraft spins. Let's look more closely at how the control surfaces affect the spin.

Ailerons We do not use ailerons to recover from a spin in the T-34 or T-37 since they rarely assist in the recovery. This makes sense in that the wing is stalled and there is not much useful air going over the ailerons. Testing in the T-37 also found that ailerons may hamper the recovery of certain types of spins. Therefore, during spin recoveries, apply neutral ailerons. On some high performance aircraft, recovery using the ailerons is necessary. The aileron on the up-going wing puts it at a higher angle of attack. This results in increased drag on the wing and produces adverse yaw to oppose the large yawing moments of the spin.

1.10-7

Rudder The rudder is generally the principal control for stopping autorotation. Due to the direction of the relative wind in a spin, the dorsal fin area or vertical stabilizer acts as a flat plate, instead of as an airfoil, with the aerodynamic force parallel to the relative wind (Figure 1.10-3). If the rudder is deflected in the same direction as the spin (pro-spin rudder), the vertical stabilizer exposed to the relative wind will be minimized. If the rudder is deflected in the opposite direction as the spin (anti-spin rudder), the vertical stabilizer exposed to the relative wind will be maximized. The drag created by the vertical stabilizer can be divided into a horizontal and vertical component. The horizontal component creates a force that opposes the yawing of the airplane. The vertical component creates a force that pulls-the tail up and pitches the nose-down. Opposite rudder maximizes both of these components SPn.l DIRECIlOl'\ ~

SPIN DlRECTlON

..-,-......

SPIN DIRECTION

.....-r--.

~Spba :B.uelder

Figure 1.10-3 Rudder Forces During a Spin The design of the vertical stabilizer and rudder and the placement of the horizontal control surfaces will significantly affect spin recovery. In the case of a swept vertical fin (Figure 1.10-4), the rudder is almost entirely blocked by the horizontal surfaces and therefore not very effective at stopping the autorotation. With the T-34 and T-37 tail designs, the rudder has not been blocked

1.10-8

T-37B

SWEPT VERTICAL FIN

T-34C

Figure 1.10-4 Rudder Configuration For the T-37, the horizontal stabilizer and the elevator tend to blank out the upper portion of the vertical stabilizer and rudder (Figure 1.10-5). The more effective portion of the rudder is the portion below the elevator. The nose down elevator is delayed for one turn during a spin recovery to ensure maximum rudder effectiveness. This is also evident during spin prevention. Delayed or slow rudder application is relation to elevator application can lead to decreased rudder effectiveness. Very slow control application may even result in a missed prevention.

Figure 1.10-5 Rudder Effectiveness The T-34 and T-37 use a dorsal fin, strakes, and ventral fin(s) to decrease the severity of spin characteristics (Figure 1.10-6). The dorsal fin is attached to the front of the vertical stabilizer to increase its surface area. This decreased the spin rate and aids in stopping the autorotation. Two ventral fins on the T-34 and one on the T-37 are located beneath the empennage. Ventral fins decrease the spin rate and aid in maintaining a nose down attitude. The T -34 has strakes located in front of the horizontal stabilizer. These stakes increase the surface area of the horizontal stabilizer in order to keep the nose pitched down and prevent a flat spin. The T-37 has stakes located on each side of the nose of the aircraft. These strakes changed the airflow over the nose creating an anti-rotational fort!:e.

1.10-9

Figure 1.10-6 T-34C Empennage

Elevator In a stabilized spin, the horizontal stabilizer and elevator are fully stalled due to an angle of attack in excess of 50 degrees. This results in very little lift and a great amount of drag. The drag will be maximized with full down elevator and minimized with full up elevator (Figure 1.10-7). This drag will also have a vertical and horizontal component like the vertical stabilizer.

•

Figure 1.10-7 Effect of Elevator Rotation rate increases as the pitch attitude in a spin becomes steeper, either from the increased nose down force from the rudder or the elevator. This is due to the conservation of angular momentum. As the pitch becomes steeper, the aircraft's center of mass, which is aft of the spin axis, moves closer to the spin axis (Figure 1.10-8). The shortened moment arm necessitates an increased angular velocity in order to conserve angular momentum. This can best be shown with the ice skater analogy. As a spinning skater's arms are brought in, the spin rate increases for the same reason. In the T-37, full aft stick results in the flattest pitch attitude and therefore the slowest spin rate. Any stick position other than full aft will result in a steeper pitch attitude and an increase in rotation rate. This is referred to as an accelerated spin. 1.10-10

I

I I

l

I \

---4 ,

I

II II

1-

-I I

J

mcxR.UAFT

sna

I, NEl.ITRAL.

Figure 1.10-8 "Ice Skater" Effect As the pitch attitude is slowly lowered. the increase in spin rate causes the center of gravity to experience a greater force away from the spin axis. The acceleration resists the airplane moving to a steeper pitch attitude. This is why brisk control inputs are emphasized in a recovery. Abrupt forward stick will drive the pitch attitude down before rotation rate can increase appreciably and build up the nose down resistance. If proper recovery procedures are not followed in the T-34. a progressive or aggravated spin could result. In a pr.ogressive spin. instead of a smooth spin recovery. you will reverse spin direction. You will get into a progressive spin if. upon recovery. you put in full opposite rudder but inadvertently maintain full aft stick . After 1 or 2 more turns in the initial spin direction. the nose will pitch steeply down and the airplane will snap into a reversed direction of rotation. The spin reversal is disorienting and the entry more violent than with a normal erect spin. No matter how disorienting and violent the entry may be. remember to look at the turn needle to determine spin direction. To recover. apply full rudder opposite the turn needle and stick forward of neutral. When rotation stops. you may become mildly disoriented. so look up at the horizon to maintain a wings level attitude during the pull-out. An aggravated spin in the T-34 results from pushing the stick forward while maintaining rudder in the direction of spin. Neutralizing rudder while advancing the stick may also be sufficient to enter an aggravated spin. It is essentially an extreme case of an accelerated spin. Aggravated spins are characterized by a steep nose-down pitch and an increase in spin rate. In addition. aggravated spins tend to induce severe pilot disorientation. Recovery procedures from an aggravated spin are the same as from a progressive spin. It is interesting that although an inverted spin in a T -34 is difficult to enter and very disorienting. it is. ironically. easy to recover from. This is because the entire vertical stabilizer is in an inverted position and, thus, 100% into the relative wind. If you're hanging in the straps. you should be in an inverted spin. Inverted spin direction is h ard t o determin e visually so ch eck the tum n eedle . T o recover. s imp ly apply full

1.10-11

rudder opposite the turn needle and neutralize the aileron and elevator. The spin will recover to a steep, inverted, nose down dive. Roll or split-S out of the dive to level flight in a timely manner as airspeed will build rapidly. In the T-37, however, inverted spins are easier to enter. It is entered only from a negative g stall. One way this can occur is by leaving the stick full forward too long in a spin recovery. A light fuel weight (below 1000 Ibs. remaining) tends to make a neg ative-g stall difficult to attain. FACTORS THAT AFFECT THE SPIN Aircraft Weight The aircraft's weight varies due to fuel usage mainly, but can also vary if items are dropped off the airplane (Le., bombs, fuel tanks, air drops, etc.). We will discuss changes in weight due mainly to fuel usage. If an aircraft carries fuel in the wings, a large portion of the weight of the airplane is away from the center of gravity. This creates a large moment of inertia for a spin to overcome. A heavier airplane will have a slower spin entry with less oscillations due to this large moment of inertia. A lighter airplane will enter a spin more quickly, with greater oscillations possible, but will also .. recover from a spin faster. A T-37 at very low fuel loads can recover from a spin with the rudder alone.

Pitch Attitude The pitch attitude will have a direct impact on the speed the aircraft stalls. The higher the pitch attitude, the greater the vertical component of thrust, and the lower the stall speed. Slower stall speeds make the spin entry slower and with less oscillations. At lower pitch attitudes, the aircraft stalls at a higher airspeed and entries are faster and more oscillatory. Spin Direction The engines of the T-37 are essentially counter-clockwise rotating gyroscopes while the propeller of the T-34 is a clockwise rotating gyroscope (when both are viewed from behind for rotation direction). If an airplane is in a right spin (nose yawing right), the nose for the T-37 will tend to pitch up and the nose of the T-34 will tend to pitch down due to gyroscopic precession. We will find that the T-37 will have a flatter attitude when spinning to the right and the T-34 will be flatter to the left. This makes for smoother entries into spins that stabilize quicker. A T-37 in a left spin and a T-34 in a right spin will have a more oscillatory entry.

1.10-12

T -37 SPIN PREVENTION The spin prevention is simply what the name implies: preventing a spin or stopping the spin before it starts. It is the preferred method of recovery from the initial stages of any spin since it is quick and results in less altitude loss. The spin prevention procedure attacks the two causes of a spin - stall and yaw. To initiate the spin prevention, use stick forces as necessary to break the stall, apply rudder as necessary to eliminate the yaw, and check the throttles at idle. Move the controls positively until the recovery is made. This is important when considering an unintentional situation in which trim position, configuration, and/or fuel weight/balance could easily require control pressures different than those you are used to in practice preventions. From a planned entry to the point of initiation of prevention controls, you should be holding full pro-spin rudder and full aft stick. As the stick and rudder are moved against the spin it takes a lot of rudder travel. As a technique, move the rudder twice as fast as the stick. The rudder will be past neutral before it starts having much effect. The stick, on the other hand, starts to provide anti-spin forces much sooner. Both the stick and rudder should be positively moved against the spin with continuous control movement until the rotation stops. Do not hesitate to use the controls you need; it may take full control deflection. If the controls are moved very slowly to full anti-spin controls (a minimum of 4 seconds to full deflection) the aircraft may go into the highest stabilized rotation rate and not recover. Now would be the time to initiate a spin recovery if altitude is available, otherwise, eject. The spin prevention technique is recommended for almost all inadvertent spin situations. However, should the variables of an unintentional entry such as surprise or apprehension result in total confusion or disorientation, the spin recovery may be the best alternative. In this situation, the altitude and time spent for orientation and completion of the spin prevention could be more than that required for the spin recovery. A lso, if altitude is critical, you may want to try the spin recove ry sin ce you may only have time for one attempt. Remember that in any recovery, early recognition of conditions leading to a spin can make the spin prevention much easier. This is one of the reasons that spins are practiced. Only in rare cases should situations develop which require immediate application of the spin recovery.

SPIN RECOVERY The spin recovery is the most positive recovery available and is 100 percent effective when properly applied. We will cover the T-37 and T-34 spin recovery procedures separately.

1.10-13

T -37 Spin Recovery Step 1. Throttles - Idle. This reduces the gyroscopic effect of the engines. Also, the recovery ends in a dive where minimum altitude loss requires throttles in idle. Even during practice recoveries, the throttle should be physically checked in idle during the recovery. This will develop the required habit pattern should an inadvertent spin occur. Remember to remove your hand from the throttle until the dive recovery or inadvertent engine shutdown may occur. Step 2. Rudder and Ailerons - Neutral. Rudder is neutralized to obtain a starting point for Step 4. If during spin practice you always applied opposite rudder from that used to enter th e spin, this could lead to a wrong rudder recovery during an inadvertent spin. Neutral rudder will also allow recovery from an inverted spin when Step 3 is accomplished. Ailerons have been found to be of no assistance and could possibly hinder the recovery due to adverse yaw. Remember, however, that after the stall is broken, ailerons may be used as needed to stop roll. Step 3. Stick - Abruptly Full Aft and Hold. Two cases need to be discussed here: (1) erect spin and (2) inverted spin. Erect Spin. Abrupt full aft stick cause.s the nose to raise and decelerates the spin. Inverted spin. Abruptly moving the stick full aft normally recovers the inverted spin. The abrupt movement causes a rapid and positive recovery to an erect full aft stick stall within one turn. From this position, you can make a normal stall recovery. If the stick is moved slowly aft or if the spin has accelerated excessively the inverted spin may continue. The missed attempt is due to acceleration in either case. If the recovery is missed you need to abruptly apply full forward stick causing the spin to decelerate. Pause at the full forward position long enough to decelerate the spin and then abruptly move the stick full aft. I

Use extreme caution when performing maneuvers with two hands on the stick to preclude inadvertent trim actuation. Step 4. Rudder - Abruptly Apply Full Rudder Opposite Spin Direction (Opposite Turn Needle) and Hold. It is imperative that opposite rudder be used. Use the turn needle (not the slip indicator) and outside references to confirm turn direction. Check for an outside reference as the rudder is applied to key application of forward stick one turn later in Step 5.

1.10-14

Note: At lower gross weights, opposite rudder may stop the spin prior to one tum. If this occurs, recover from the erect stall by easing the stick forward and neutralizing the rudder, then recover from the dive.

Step 5. Stick - Abruptly Full Forward One Turn After Applying Rudder. Move the stick full forward abruptly and hold it there until the aircraft pitch attitude approaches the vertical (straight down). The amount of time that the stick is held full forward will vary from spin to spin depending on variables such as spin direction, gross weight, and rudder application. For example, the lighter the aircraft, the more effect opposite rudder has, the less inertia there is for the elevator to overcome, and the faster the resultant pitch change will occur. In this case, you would not need to hold the stick forward very long. However, a heavyweight left spin takes longer for the nose to pitch down near the vertical so the stick will have to be held forward for a longer period of time. Here, not holding the stick forward long enough could easily leave the nose of the aircraft short of the recovery cone and result in a missed recovery. Step 6. Controls - Neutral After Spinning Stops and Recover From Dive. Do not return the elevator to a position forward or aft of neutral. Forward of neutral could result in a transition to an inverted spin; aft of neutral can result in a secondary stall and spin entry. Neutralize the rudder only after the rotation has stopped, not necessarily when the elevator is neutralized. Now that the aircraft is flying again, use elevator, rudder, and aileron controls to return to level flight. T-34 Spin Recovery Step 1. Landing gear and flaps - Check Up. Step 2. Verify spin indications by checking AOA, airspeed, and turn needle. If recovery from erect spif.1 does not occur within two turns after applying recovery controls, verify cockpit indications of AOA, airspeed and turn needle for steady statespin and visually confirm proper spin recovery controls are applied. Step 3. Apply full rudder opposite the turn needle. If positive force is not applied to maintain full deflection, spin recovery may take several additional turns. Step 4. Position stick forward of neutral

(~ilerons

neutral).

(1) Erect Spin: Expect a push force of approximately 40 pounds to keep the stick forward of the neutral position. (2) Inverted Spin: Expect a pull force of approximately 30 pounds to place the stick in the neutral position.

1.10-15

Step 5. Neutralize controls as rotation stops. Also reduce power to idle to minimize altitude loss and ra pid airspeed buildup.

Step 6. Recover from the ensuing unusual attitude. Aircraft will consistently recover in a steep. nose-down attitude. Slowly apply back-stick pressure until nose reaches the horizon and wings are level.

1.10-16

STUDY QUESTIONS Spins 1.

Define spin. What are the two requirements for entering a spin?

2.

Compare the up-going and down-going wings in a spin with respect to AOA, C L and Co.

3.

What are the instruments to observe to determine if you are in a spin?

4.

How do high gross weights affect the rate of spin entry?

5.

How do high pitch attitudes affect the rate of spin entry.

6.

What are the basic spin recovery procedures from an erect spin? A. B. C. D.

7.

Reverse rotation, break the stall. Stop rotation and reverse roll. Break the stall and stop rotation. Stop the rotation and roll.

Wh at would be the result if the rudder were maintained in the direction of spin during a spin recovery?

1.10-17

8.

What is the cause of an erect spin?

9.

Can the T-37 enter a spin if neutral rudder is held? Explain.

10.

In which direction are spin entries more oscillatory and take longer to stabilize in the T-34C or T-37B?

11.

In the T-37B, if forward pressure on the stick is held too long during step 5, what may happen to the aircraft?

12.

In the T-37B, if two hands are used on the stick for spin recovery, what hazard should be guarded against?

13.

In the T-37B, after applying rudder, how many turns are required to develop full rudder effectiveness under all conditions?

14.

During a recovery from an inverted spin, what action should be taken when the rotation stops?

15.

What may happen during an inverted spin if the stick is moved slowly to the full aft position instead of abruptly?

16.

When should you abandon the spin prevention?

1.10-18

17.

In what manner should the controls be used during a spin prevention? a. b. c. d.

18.

When is the spin prevention most effective? a. b. c. d.

19.

Abrupt and contiuous Positive and continuous Abrupt and full Positive, using at least 4 seconds to reach full deflection

during the early stages of a spin after spin development after spin stabilization during inverted spins

What do the turn needles indicate during a spin? a. b. c. d.

direction of spin for erect spins only direction of spin for inverted spins only centrifugal force displaces both needles outward away from the spin axis direction of spin always

1.10-19

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.10-20

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Turning Flight Assignment Sheet No. 1.11.1A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding maneuver limitations as they relate to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.151

Describe how the forces acting on an airplane produce a level coordinated turn.

1.152

Define load factor.

1.153

Describe the relationship between load factor and angle of bank for level flight.

1.154

State the effect of maneuvering on stall speed.

1.155

Define load, strength, static strength, static failure, fatigue strength, fatigue failure, service life, creep, limit load factor, elastic limit, overstress/over-g, and ultimate load factor.

1.156

State the relationship between the elastic limit and the limit load factor.

1.157

Describe and identify the parts of the V-nN-g diagram, including the major axes, limit load factor, ultimate load factor, maneuvering speed/cornering velocity, redline airspeed, accelerated stall lines, and the safe flight envelope.

1.158

List and describe the phenomena that are used to determine red line airspeed.

1.159

State the limit load factors, maneuvering speed, and redline airspeed for the T-34 or T-37. 1.11-1

1.160

Describe the effects of weight, altitude, and configuration on the safe flight envelope .

1.161

Define asymmetric loading and state the limitations.

1.162

Define gust loading.

1.163

State what should be done not to exceed the limit load factor in moderate turbulence.

1.164

Define turn radius and turn rate.

1.165

State the effect of velocity, angle of bank, weight, slipping, and skidding on turn rate and turn radius.

1.166

Define standard rate turn.

1.167

State the approximate angle of bank for a standard rate tum in the T -34 or the T-37.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.11.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.11-2

INFORMATION SHEET Turning Flight Information Sheet 1.11.11 INTRODUCTION Unlike an automobile or other ground supported vehicles, an aircraft can rotate about three axes. It can pitch up and down, yaw left or right, and roll to the left or the right. Because of this freedom of movement, the airplane can perform many maneuvers. However, all these maneuvers consist of turns, either horizontal or vertical, or a combination of the two. This lesson discusses turns and the limits imposed on them. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots Chapters 13 and 15

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.0.1T-37B-1) section V

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

5.

AETCM 3-3, Vol 2, Chapter 2,2.2,2.7 and 2.9

INFORMATION MANEUVERING FORCES Turning flight is described as changing the direction of the airplane's flight path by reorienting the lift vector in the desired direction. During a turn, the lift vector is divided into two components, a horizontal component (LH) and a vertical component (Lv) (Figure 1.11-1). The horizontal component of lift, called centripetal force, accelerates the airplane toward the inside of the turn. In straight and level flight (constant altitude, constant direction) total lift is equal to weight, but in a turn, only the vertical component of the lift vector opposes weight. If the pilot does not increase the total lift vector, the airplane will lose altitude because weight will be greater th an Lv. The increased lift is norm ally 1.11-3

CENTRIPETAL PORCE

'L n- W

Figure 1.11-1 Tuming Flight

obtained by increasing the angle of attack, that is, pulling back on the stick. As the stick moves aft, G-forces build up. Increasing the lift produced by the wings increases the load on the airplane. Load factor (n) is the ratio of total lift to the airplane's weight. It is sometimes called G'S since it is the number of times the earth's gravitational pull felt by the pilot. For example, a 3,000 pound airplane in a 60° angle of bank turn must produce 3,000 pounds of vertical lift to maintain altitude. Therefore, the wings must produce 6,000 pounds of total lift so the airplane experiences a load on its wings that is twice the force of gravity, or 2 G's. One "G" is what we experience just sitting or walking.

L W

n=-

L=W·n

or

In maneuvering flight, the amount of lift produced by an airplane is equal to its weight (W) multiplied by its load factor (n). By substituting W. n into the lift equation and solving for V, we can derive an equation for stall speed during maneuvering flight. This is called accelerated stall speed because it represents the stall speed at velocities greater than minimum straight and level stall speed, and load factors greater than one. Phi (
2Wn

2Wn pSC LMAX Maneuvering the airplane will significantly affect stall speed . Stall speed increases when we induce a load factor greater than one on the airplane. Figure 1.11-2 is a generic chart that can be used for any fixed wing aircraft and assumes a constant altitude turn. It lists the load factors and percent increase in stall speed for varying angles of bank. Notice that above 45° angle of bank the increase in load factor and stall speed is rapid. This emphasizes the need to avoid steep turns at low airspeeds. An airplane in a 60° angle of bank experiences 2 G's, but has an accelerated stall speed that is 40% greater than wings level stall speed.

1.11-4

, , J

I

I I / I

J J

II

I 'r.~y

Ail' "",<

Da

~ ~

.,.

""

m m _

..I'r"

/

If

I

.tl- I ..c.1 r.>'" I

-

A-I

"3

"/ ~" c~

--

m _

11

10

~

2

_

•

t

ANtILl 011 URI< ... DIIIIRIU

Figure 1.11-2 Stall Speed vs AOe

A quick method for calculating accelerated stall speed is to round your normal stall speed off to a higher, round number and multiply it by the square root of the number of G's sustained . For example, if your stall speed is 92 kts and you are to perform a 2 G maneuver, you could estimate your accelerated stall speed by rounding 92 kts up to 100 kts, then multiply by the square root of two, 1.4. As the load factor approaches three G's, you will notice a sensation of blood draining from your head and a tendency for your face to sag. Further increases in G loading may cause you to grayout or even temporarily lose consciousness if you do not correctly accomplish the anti-G straining maneuver. As the load factor approaches negative three G's, you will notice a sensation of blood rushing to your head and your face and eyeballs will feel like they are bulging out. Exceeding negative three G's may cause you to 'Ired out" or even suffer from bursting blood vessels. DEFINITIONS A load is a stress-producing force that is imposed upon an airplane or component. Strength is a measure of a material's resistance to load. There are two types of strength: Static strength and fatigue strength. Static strength is a measure of a material's resistance to a single application of a steadily increasing load or force. Static failure is the breaking (or serious permanent deformation) of a material due to a single application of a steadily increasing load or force. For instance, a pencil breaks when you exceed its static strength by applying too much force. Fatigue strength is a measure of a material's ability to withstand a cyclic application of load or force, i.e., numerous small applications of a small force over a long period of time. Fatigue failure is the breaking (or serious permanent deformation) of a material due to a cyclic application of load or force. Breaking a wire coat hanger by bending it back and forth demonstrates fatigue failure. Airplanes may experience fatigue failure on many components (landing gear struts, tailhooks and mounting brackets) due to the numerous arrested landings, catapult shots, and high G maneuvers performed in normal operation. The components are designed to withstand repeated loads, but not forever. Service life is the [lumber of applications of load or force that a component can withstand before it has the probability of failing . Fatigue strength plays a major role in determining service life. Service life may apply to an individual component, or to the entire airframe. When a metal is subjected to high stress and temperature it tends to stretch or elongate. This is called plastic deformation or creep. Engine turbine blades are periodically monitored for creep damage due to high heat and stress. Modem supersonic aircraft may suffer from creep damage on the skin of the airplane, especially on the leading edge of the wings. The structural limits of an airplane are primarily due to the metal skeleton or airframe. Any time a wing produces lift, it bends upward. The wing may permanently deform if lift becomes too great. Airframe components, particularly the wings, determine 1.11-5

the maximum load that the airplane can withstand. The two greatest loads on an airplane are lift and weight. Since weight doesn't vary greatly from one moment to the next, lift will be the force that causes the maximum load to be exceeded. It is difficult to measure the amount of lift produced by the airplane, but it is relatively easy to measure acceleration . Since acceleration is proportional to force (Newton's Second Law), if we know the weight of the airplane, we can determine the amount of lift by monitoring the airplane's acceleration. Since load factor is a ratio of an airplane's lift to its weight, and the mass being accelerated by lift and weight is the same mass, load factor is actually the acceleration due to lift expressed as a multiple of the earth's acceleration, and can easily be measured by an accelerometer. Structural considerations determined by the airplane's mission and desired service life force a manufacturer to meet certain limits, such as maximum load factor, airspeed and maneuvering limitations. These design limits include the limit load factor, ultimate load factor, redline airspeed, and maneuvering parameters. Limit load factor is the greatest load factor an airplane can sustain without any risk of permanent deformation. It is the maximum load factor anticipated in normal daily operations. If the limit load factor is exceeded, some structural damage or permanent deformation may occur. Aircraft will have both positive and negative limit load factors. ·' The T-34C's limit load factor is set at +4.5 G's and -2.3 G's. The T-37B's limit load factor is set at +6.67 G's and -2.67 G's. Overstress/Over-g is the condition of possible permanent deformation or damage that results from exceeding the limit load factor. This type of damage will reduce the service life of the airplane because it weakens the airplane's basic structure. Overstress/over-g may occur without visibly damaging the airframe. Inside the airplane are a variety of components, such as hydraulic actuators and engine mounts, which are not designed to withstand the same loads that the airframe can. Before the airframe experiences static failure these components may break if overstressed. The wing will not depart the airplane if we exceed the limit load factor, but if an engine mount breaks, a fire could result from fuel spewing on hot engine casing. Any time an airplane experiences an overstress, maintenance personnel must inspect to determine if damage or permanent deformation actually occurred. Always report an overstress/over9 to maintenance. Whether or not deformation or damage occurs depends on the elastic limit of the individual components. If a rigid metal object, such as a wing, is subjected to a steadily increasing load, it will bend or twist. When the load is removed, the component may return to its original shape. The elastic limit is the maximum load that may be applied to a component without permanent deformation. When a component is stressed beyond the elastic limit, it will experience some permanent deformation, but may still be usable. If the force continues to increase, the component will break. To ensure that the airplane may operate at its limit load factor without permanent deformation, the limit load factor is designed to be less than the elastic limit of individual components. This virtually

1.11-6

guarantees the airplane to reach its expected service life. Ultimate load factor is the maximum load factor that the airplane can withstand without structural failure. There will be some permanent deformation at the ultimate load factor, but no actual failure of the major load-carrying components should occur. If you exceed the ultimate load factor, structural failure is imminent (something major on the airplane will break) . The ultimate load factor should be avoided since the typical airplane is rather difficult to fly after its wings tear off. The ultimate load factor is 150% of the limit load factor. Van I VaG DIAGRAM The Van diagram or VaG diagram is a graph that summarizes an airplane's structural and aerodynamic limitation. The horizontal axis is indicated airspeed, since this is what we see in the cockpit. The vertical axis of the graph is load factor, or G's. The V-n diagram represents the maneuvering envelope of the airplane for a particular weight, altitude, and configuration. Accelerated stall lines, or lines of maximum lift, represent the maximum load factor that an airplane can produce based on airspeed. The accelerated stall lines are determined by C Lmax AOA. They are the curvifl9 lines on the left side of the V-n diagram(Figure 1.11-3). If we try to maintain a constant airspeed and increase lift beyond the accelerated stall lines, the airplane will stall because we have exceeded the stalling angle of attack. As airspeed increases, more lift can be produced without exceeding the stalling angle of attack.

o

7 6

SAFE FUGHT

5.

[]

4

~ 3 t; 2 ~ 1

STALL

~o ... -1

-2 -3

STRUCTURAL FAILURE

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

INDICATE!) AIRSPEED

Figure 1.11-3 T-34C Van Diagram

1.11-7

The limit load factors and ultimate load factors, both positive and negative, are plotted on the diagram. These lines represent the manufacturer's and the military's structural limitations. Any G load above the limit load factor will overstress the airplane. Any G load above the ultimate load factor is very likely to cause structural failure. Notice that the positive and negative limit load factors are different. Since the pilot cannot sustain a negative acceleration much greater than three G's, the designer can save some structural weight by reducing the airplane's ability to sustain negative G's. Thus, most maneuvers are performed with positive accelerations (Figure 1.11-4). The point where the accelerated stall line and the limit load factor line intersect is called the maneuver point. The lAS at the maneuver point is called the maneuver speed (Va) or cornering velocity. It is the lowest airspeed at which the limit load factor can be reached. Below the maneuver speed, we can never exceed the limit load factor because the airplane will stall before the limit load factor is reached. The T-34's maneuver speed is 135 KIAS at maximum gross weight. The T-37's maneuver speed is 235 KIAS at maximum gross weight.

7

e 15

o

4

c: 3

~

~

~ :::::::::::::::

SAFE

FUCIHT

2

r:7:1

~ STALL

1

C

g ....

0

II

·1

·2

UNSAFE

.:3

o

100 INDICATED AlASPI!ED-

Figura 1.11·4 T·378 V·G Diagram The vertical line on the right side is called the redline airspeed. or VNE (Velocity never-to-exceed). Redline airspeed is the highest airspeed that your airplane is allowed to fly. Flight at speeds above VNE can cause structura\ damage. VNE is determined by one of several methods: MCRIT. airframe temperature. excessive structural loads. or controllability limits. If an airplane reaches its critical Mach number (MCRIT), and is not designed to withstand supersonic airflow, the shock waves generated may damage the structure of the airplane. Redline airspeed for these aircraft will be slightly below the airspeed at 1.11-8

which they will achieve MeRIT. The T-37's redl ine airspeed of 382 KIAS or 0.7 Mach . whichever occurs first. It is based on 0.7 Mach which is slightly less than it's MCRIT. Redline airspeed may also be used to set limits on airframe temperature. As airspeed increases, the airplane encounters more air particles producing friction which heats up the airframe. This heating can be extreme and hazardous at high speeds. Once the temperature becomes excessive, the airframe may suffer creep damage. Excessive structural loads may be encountered on components other than the main structural members. Control surfaces, flaps, stabilizers, and other external components are often not able to withstand the same forces that the wings or fuselage can withstand. Deflecting control surfaces at very high airspeeds may create sufficient forces to twist or break the wing or stabilizer on which they are located . Excessive horizontal stabilizer loads can be encountered in the T-34C at speeds in excess of its redline airspeed of 280 KIAS. Controllability may determine the red line airspeed on aircraft with conventional control systems. At high airspeeds, dynamic pressure may create forces on the control surfaces which exceed the pilot's ability to overcome. Or, due to the aeroelasticity of the controls surfaces, full deflection of the cockpit controls may cause only small deflection of the control surfaces. In either case, the pilot will be unable to provide sufficient control input to safely maneuver the airplane. FACTORS The portion of the V-n diagram that is bounded by the accelerated stall lines, the limit load factors and redline airspeed is called the safe flight envelope. The five mOajor factors affecting the safe flight envelope are gross weight, altitude, configuration, asymmetric loading, and gust loading. The gross weight of an airplane will affect the airplane's limit load factor and ultimate load factor. Consider an airplane whose wing is built to withstand 20,000 pounds of static load; this will determine how many G's can be pulled. If the airplane .takes off with a weight of 5,000 pounds, it could withstand 4 G'S (20,000/ 5,000 = 4). !f the airplane weight decreases by burning fuel or expending ordnance, the limit load factor will increase. If the same airplane decreased its weight to 4,000 pounds, it could now withstand 5 G's. An increase in weight will also cause the accelerated stall lines to sweep to the right since an increase in weight increases an airplane's stall speed. This causes the maneuver speed to increase (Figure 1.11-5). Weight generally does not affect redline airspeed. Since its weight changes are small compared to other aircraft, they are not accounted for in the T-34C's or T-378's safe flight envelope.

1.11-9

7

7

8

6

5 4

5 4

I;

!

3 ~ 2

... 1

10.,

~.~

·2

-2 -3

-3 0

50

100

150

200

2SO

GOO

so

0

100

150

200

250

300

INDICATE) AlRSPII!D

INDICATED A1ASPE!D

Figure 1,11-6 Altitude

Figure 1.11·5 Gross Weight

As altitude increases, the speed of sound will decrease and TAS will increase for a given lAS. With an increase in altitude the indicated redJine airspeed must decrease in order to keep a subsonic airplane below MCRIT TAS: Since the limit and ultimate load factors are structural limits, they do not change with altitude. Since the horizontal axis is indicated airspeed , the accelerated stall lines will not change. Above 20,000 feet. the T34C's redline airspeed decreases to 245 KIAS (Figure 1.11-6). The T-37 redline airspeed is 382 KIAS or 0.7 Mach, whichever occurs first. The T-37 airspeed indicator's barber pole pointer gives you the redline airspeed .. Another factor that affects the safe flight envelope is configuration. When the landing gear and high lift devices are extended, the envelope is substantially reduced in size. This is mainly due to the relatively weak structure of the landing gear doors and the deployed high lift devices. High airspeeds could possibly tear the landing gear doors off or bend the flaps. An airplane in the landing configuration does not need to maneuver at high speeds and create high G loading. Changing the configuration by adding external stores, such as weapons or drop tanks, may also reduce red line airspeed because the higher air loads imposed may tear them from the airplane (Figure 1.11-7).

1.11-10

7

• 5

·2 -3

o

50

100

150

2CIO

2&0

INDICA-nD AIRSIIEI!D

Figure 1.11-7 Configuration

300

Asymmetric loading refers to 7 uneven production of lift on the wings of an e airplane. It may be caused by a rolling 5 pullout. trapped fue l, or hung ordnance. 4 The V-n diagram may reflect limits that are 32 .................. imposed because of this condition (Figure 1.11-8). When an airplane is rolling, the up- ' .... 1 going wing is producing more lift than the 9 0 -r.-:-~ down-going wing . If the airplane performs a g .1 rolling pullout, the up-going wing may ·2 become overstressed even though the accelerometer in the cockpit shows a G 300 250 150 200 100 50 o load at or below the limit load factor. This INDICATED AIRSPEED would be aggravated even further if there were an imbalance of ordnance or fuel on Figure 1.1 1-8 Asymmetric Loading the wings. For this reason, in all maneuvers or Gust Loading requiring a pullout at higher than normal loading, one of the first steps is to always level the wings. If the pilot were to experience an asymmetric load after a bombing run, i.e., hung ordnance, special attention must be paid to the amount of G's and angle of bank. Because asymmetric loading is cumulative with pilot induced loading , the limit load factor due to pilot induced loads should be reduced to approximately two-thirds of the normal limit load factor. This will ensure that one wing is not overstressed. In the T-34C, the maximum load factor during asymmetric loading would be 3 G's (2/3 X 4.5). The "unsymmetric limit" for the T-37 is 4.8 G's.

i

Gust loading refers to the increase in the G load due to vertical wind gusts. The load imposed by a gust is dependent upon the velocity of the gust. The higher the velocity, the greater the increase in load. If an airplane were generating the limit load factor during a maximum performance turn and hit a vertical gust, the gust will instantaneously increase the angle of attack of the airfoils and increase the lift on the wings enough to raise the G load above the limit load factor . This is why "intentional flight through severe or extreme turbulence and thunderstorms is prohibited" in the T34C or T-37B. Vertical gusts of up to 30 feet per second may be encountered in moderate turbulence. This could produce up to 2 G's of acceleration on the airplane. Because gust loading is cumulative with pilot induced loading, the limit load factor due to pilot induced loads should be reduced to two-thirds of the normallimrt load factor. Again the two-thirds rule can be used. The T-34C NATOPS recommends a limit of +3.0 G's .. Since asymmetric loads, gust loads, and pilot induced loads are all cumulative, encountering both gust loading and asymmetric loading at the same time would require that you apply the two-thirds rule twice: (4.5 X 2/3) X 2/3) = 2.0 G'S. For this reason, if you make the mistake of entering a thunderstorm, never tum around to get out of it, you should continue to the other side since maneuvering increases the pilot induced loads.

1.11-11

Turbulence penetration also requires that you slow the airplane to a speed that will reduce the effects of stress cC:used by gust loading. NATOPS states that the maximum airspeed for the T -34C in moderate turbulence is 195 KIAS. Turbulent air penetration speed for the T-37B is 180KIAS. If you enter severe or extreme turbulence, you should slow to an airspeed less than this. Maneuver speed is normally what the manufacturer recommends you fly because the airplane cannot be overstressed for positive G'S at that airspeed . At a slower airspeed you will stall easier and it makes no sense to spend more time than necessary in the turbulence. TURN PERFORMANCE Turn performance is measured using two different parameters, turn rate and turn radius. Turn rate (00 ) is the rate of heading change, measured in degrees per second. Turn radius (r) is a measure of the radius of the circle the flight path scribes. Turn performance in a level coordinated turn is controlled only by airspeed and angle of bank. Weight, altitude, load factor, stalling angle of attack, engine performance, and wing loading may limit either the airspeed or angle of bank. This would limit maximum turn rate or minimum turn radius, however, the actual performance would still be determined using only airspeed and angle of bank. The formulas for determining the turn rate and turn radius for an airplane in coordinated flight are: 0- tan A.. OJ = _o___'jJ_

r=----

gtan¢

[7

Where:

00

= turn rate

v = velocity

r = turn radius cj)

= angle of bank

9 = gravitational acceleration If velocitv is increased for a given angle of bank, tum rate will decrease. and tum radius will increase . An example of this would be turning a very sharp comer on a bicycle at 5 mph versus trying to turn the same corner at 30 mph. If angle of bank is increased for a given velocitv. tum rate will increase. and tum radius will decrease. You can see that maximum turn rate and minimum turn radius would be achieved in a 90° angle of bank turn, at the airplane's minimum velocity. However, there are limits on angle of bank and velocity. Minimum velocity, stall speed, is determined by Clmax AOA. Maximum turn performance will be achieved at the accelerated stall speed for whatever angle of bank is being flown. An increase in angle of bank increases the accelerated stall speed. and vice versa.

1.11-12

Maximum angle of bank to maintain level flight is limited by the limit load factor. Looking at Figure 1.11-2, you can see that if an airplane's limit load is 2 G's, the maximum angle of bank that it could maintain will be 60 degrees. With a limit load factor of 4.5, the T-34 is limited to about 78 degrees angle of bank in level flight, while the T-37 can maintain 82 degrees with its limit load factor of 6.67. An airplane's thrust limit may also limit its turn performance. Since induced drag is directly proportional to lift squared, an airplane pulling 5 G's would produce 25 times as much induced drag as in level flight. If the maximum thrust available can only overcome 16 times as much induced drag, then the airplane can only maintain level flight at 4 G's. Of the three factors that limit turn performance, CLmax AOA and the limit load factor are found on the V-n diagram at the maneuver point. Assuming the airplane's angle of bank is not thrust limited, this is where we achieve our maximum turn performance. Any deviation from the maneuver point produces an undesired result. If velocity increases at a constant load factor, turn rate will decrease and turn radius will increase. If velocity decreases at a constant load factor, the airplane will stall. If angle of bank increases at a constant velocity, the airplane will stall. If angle of bank decreases at a constant velocity, turn radius will increase and turn rate will decrease. Turn rate and turn radius are independent of weight. Any two airplanes capable of flying at the same velocity and same angle of bank can fly in formation, regardless of their weights. The load factor and turn performance for both airplanes will be the same, however the heavier airplane will be producing more lift. Instrument flight requires that turns be made at a standard rate . A Standard Rate Turn (SRT) is one in which 3° of turn are completed every second . A rough estimate used to determine standard rate turns in the T-34C is angle of bank equal to 15-20 percent of airspeed. The T-37 uses a rough estimate of 30° AOB. A Standard Rate Turn is equal to two needle widths deflection on the turn needle in the T-34 and T37. The turn-and-slip indicator gives the pilot a visual indication of coordinated flight. It consists of a turn needle and a ball suspended in fluid. If the ball is centered, the aircraft is in coordinated flight (Figure 1.11-9). If the ball is displaced in the same direction as the turn, the aircraft is in a slip. If the ball is displaced in the opposite direction as the turn, the aircraft is in a skid. Whenever the aircraft becomes uncoordinated during flight, the corrective action is to alter the amount of rudder being used. This simply means to apply rudder in the direction the ball is displaced. Therefore, if the ball is displaced to the right, apply right rudder. A memory aid to remember the proper rudder correction is "Step on the ball." The amount of rudder necessary will depend on the amount of adverse yaw.

1.11-13

Figure 1.11-9 Coordinated Tum

A skid is caused by using too much rudder in the desired direction of tum (Figure 1.11-10). The yawing movement is toward the inside of the turn and the balance ball is deflected toward the outside due to centrifugal force. In a skid . tum radius will decrease and turn rate will increase. Skids are dangerous because the airplane will roll inverted jf stall occurs (a skidded turn stall). Such a stall will probably be fatal at low altitude .

.,-.

~, DeCREASED TURN RADIUS, INCREASED TURN RATE

\J

INCREASED TURN RADIUS, DECREASED TURN RATE

Figure 1.11-11 Slip

Figure 1.11-10 Skid

A slip is caused by insufficient rudder in the desired direction of turn (Figure 1.11-11). The yawing movement is toward the outside of the tum, and the balance ball is deflected toward the inside, due to gravitational pull. In a slip. tum radius will increase and turn rate will decrease. Slips are useful for crosswind landings (commonly described as "wing down, top rudder"), or when trying to increase the airplane rate of descent without increasing airspeed. A stall while in a slip will cause the airplane to roll toward wings level (a safer reaction than the skid). But it must be remembered that any stall at low altitude could be fatal. 1.11-14

THE FINAL TURN

At this point, it is important to understand how the aircraft's turning limitations affect flying the final turn. The final turn is a critical phase of flight where disregard for aerodynamic limitations can result in disaster. You've learned that increased Gs are required as you increase bank angle during a level turn. This also applies during constant descents such as the final turn. Let's take another look at the V-g diagram (Figure 1.11-4). If you enter that chart at the left with various load factors (Gs), you should note increased stall speeds for increased load factors. Many pilots have made the fatal mistake of increasing bank and back pressure excessively to avoid overshooting the runway. They stall the aircraft, and depending upon the nature of the aircraft, the power response time, altitude, and the stall recognition point, the aircraft may not be recoverable prior to ground impact. This situation can easily be avoided . First, plan your pattern so that an excessively tight final turn won't be required and analyze the pattern winds. Second, if faced with an overshooting final approach, initiate a go-around/wave-off and continue the turn with safe amounts of bank and back pressure.

1.11-15

STUDY QUESTIONS

Turning Flight

1.

What must be done to the total lift vector in order to make a constant altitude turn?

2.

In a constant altitude turn, what are the two components of total lift? What part do each play in turning the airplane?

3.

What is the ratio of total lift to airplane weight called?

4.

What determines the load factor on an aircraft in a level turn?

5.

a.

Aircraft weight

b.

Angle of bank

c.

Aircraft speed

d.

Angle of attack

How many G 'S will an SR-71 produce in a 70 degree AOS level turn?

a.

2.0

b.

2.9

c.

40

d.

70

1.11-16

6. What effect does an increase in angle of bank have on the load factor in order to maintain altitude in a 90° angle of bank turn? How can an airplane maintain its altitude in a 90° angle of bank turn?

7.

Describe the effects of turning/maneuvering flight on stall speed. Why?

8.

Define static strength and fatigue strength.

9.

State and define the two types of metal failure.

10.

Define limit load factor. What will occur when the limit load factor is exceeded?

11.

What are the limit load factors of the T-34C or T-37B? a. T-34C + - - - G'S, - - - - G'S b. T-37B + ___ G'S, - _ _ _ G'S

1.11-17

12.

The is the maximum load that may be applied to a component without permanent deformation. "'Jhen a component is it will experience some permanent stressed beyond the deformation I

13.

Define ultimate load factor. What will happen if the ultimate load factor is exceeded? What is the ultimate load factor if the limit load factor is 6.0 G'S?

14.

What is the vertical axis on the V-n diagram? Why is the horizontal axis of the V-n diagram labeled lAS?

15.

What are the accelerated stall lines?

16.

Define maneuvering speed. What is the maneuvering speed of the T-34 or T-37.

1.11-18

17.

Define redline airspeed. List the phenomena that define redline airspeed .

18.

How does an increase in weight affect the limit load factor and ultimate load factor? Redline airspeed? Accelerated stall lines?

19.

How does an increase in altitude affect the limit load factor and ultimate load factor? Redline airspeed? Accelerated stall lines?

20.

How will changing the configuration affect the size and shape of the safe flight envelope?

21.

When encountering asymmetric loading, what must the pilot do to prevent overstress? Give several examples of asymmetric loading.

22.

Identify the stress condition placed on an airplane by turbulence. What must the pilot do to prevent damage to the airplane when encountering turbulence?

1.11-19

23.

What is the maximum turbulent air penetration airspeed for the T-34C? If the T-34C were to accidentally fly into severe or extreme turbulence, at what airspeed should you fly?

24.

What is the T-37B thunderstorm penetration airspeed?

25.

When airspeed is increased in a level turn, a constant rate turn may be the angle of bank. This will the load maintained by factor.

26.

As velocity decreases at a constant angle of bank, turn rate will _ __ With an increase in angle of bank at a constant airspeed, turn radius will

27.

What controls must you adjust in order to perform a coordinated 30 degree AOB level turn to the left?

1.11-20

28.

How many seconds will it take to complete a standard rate turn for 210 degrees of heading change?

29.

In a slip, the yawing movement is toward the (inside/outside) of the turn, turn radius will (increase/decrease), and turn rate will (increase/decrease).

30.

An uncoordinated turn in which the airplane is yawing toward the inside is called a . Turn radius will , turn rate will , and the turn needle and ball will be on (opposite sides/the same side).

1.11-21

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.11-22

ASSIGNMENT SHEET Takeoff/Landing Performance, Wake Turbulence and Wind Shear Assignment Sheet No. 1.12.1 A INTRODUCTION The purpose of this assignment sheet is to aid the student in understanding takeoff and landing as it relates to aerodynamics. LESSON TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES Terminal Objective: Partially supported by this lesson topic: 1.0

Upon completion of this unit of instruction, the student aviator will demonstrate knowledge of basic aerodynamic factors that affect airplane performance.

Enabling Objectives: Completely supported by this lesson topic: 1.168

Define takeoff and landing speeds.

1.169

State the factors affecting the takeoff and landing speeds.

1.170

Describe the effects on true airspeed, indicated airspeed, and ground speed for takeoff and landing due to variations in weight, density, high lift devices, and wind.

1.171

Describe the forces acting on an airplane during takeoff and landing.

1.172

State the factors affecting takeoff and landing distance.

1.173

Describe the effects on takeoff and landing distance due to variations in weight, altitude, temperature, humidity, high lift devices, and wind.

1.174

Describe how crosswinds affect an airplane during takeoff and landing.

1.175

Describe how runway alignment is maintained during a crosswind takeoff or landing.

1.176

Define ground effect. 1.12-1

1.177

Describe the effects of ground effect on lift and drag.

1.178

State when the T-34 or T-37 will be in ground effect.

1.179

State the preferred method used to stop an airplane that is hydroplaning.

1.180

State the cause of wingtip vortices.

1.181

State how interference between airplanes in flight affects the aerodynamic forces acting on each airplane.

1.182

State the airplane configuration when vortex strength is greatest.

1.183

Identify the hazards of encountering another aircraft's wake turbulence.

1.184

Identify the appropriate wake turbulence avoidance procedures.

1.185

Define wind shear.

1.186

Identify the causes of wind shear.

1.187

Identify the hazards associated with wind shear during takeoff and landing.

STUDY ASSIGNMENT Review Information Sheet 1.12.11 and answer the Study Questions.

1.12-2

INFORMATION SHEET Takeoff and Landing Performance Wake Turbulence and Wind Shear Information Sheet No. 1.12.11 INTRODUCTION Every flight begins with a takeoff and ends (hopefully) with a safe landing. Throughout aviation history many mishaps have occurred during these demanding maneuvers. Therefore, a firm understanding of the factors involved is very important. In addition, we will discuss the hazards of encountering wake turbulence and the appropriate wake turbulence avoidance procedures. We will then start our discussion on wind shear: its definition, its causes and the effect wind shear has on an aircraft during takeoff and landing. Lastly, we will discuss·techniques for recovering from a wind shear incident and methods of detecting wind shear. REFERENCES 1.

Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators

2.

Aerodynamics for Pilots, Chapter 14

3.

Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft (T.O.1T-37B-1), Section II Appendix

4.

T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual

5.

AETCM 3-3, Vol 2, Chaper 1, 1.10 Wake Turbulence

INFORMATION TAKEOFF AND LANDING SPEED

2W pSClMAJ{

V

LDG

~

1.3

2W pSC

UMX

Takeoffs and landings are transitional maneuvers during which the weight of the airplane is shifted between the landing gear and the wings. The minimum airspeed for takeoff is approximately 20 percent above the power-off stall speed, while landing speed is about 30 percent higher. Thus, both are affected by the same factors that affect stall speed. This safety margin minimizes operation in the region of reverse command and allows for shallow turns after takeoff, especially during an engine failure. The higher

1.12-3

velocity on landing compensates for the decreased power setting. High lift devices are often used to decrease takeoff and landing speeds. Note that the above equations are true airspeeds. Indicated airspeed for takeoff and landing will not be affected by changes in air density.

2W

IAS

LDG

~

1.3

2W

THRUST

ROWNG FRICTION

Figure 1.12-1 Takeoff and Landing Forces TAKEOFF AND LANDING FORCES Figure 1.12-1 shows the forces acting on an airplane during takeoff or landing. During ground roll, rolling friction (F R) accounts for the effects of friction between the landing gear and the runway. Like any frictional force, it is the product of a coefficient of friction (J.1) and a perpendicular force (weight-an-wheels or WOW) . WOW is the difference between weight and lift. The coefficient of friction is dependent upon runway surface . runway condition. tire type and degree of brake application. Note that brake application should be negligible during takeoff.

FR

= p(W -L)

Takeoff and landing performance are dependent upon acceleration. According to Newton's Second l aw, a body accelerates in the direction of the unbalanced force acting on it. Thrust is the most out of balance force on takeoff. For an airplane to accelerate from zero to its takeoff speed, it must generate enough thrust to overcome rolling friction . and drag. Although thrust and weight may change slightly during our takeoff, we will consider them to remain nearly constant. As velocity increases during takeoff, the aerodynamic force increases, increasing both lift and drag (drag is primarily parasitic during a takeoff or landing). The increase in lift during the takeoff roll decreases the weight on wheels and rolling friction. T - 0 - FR is called the net accelerating force . 1.12-4

During the landing roll, thrust and weight still remain nearly constant (reverse thrust is discussed later). Lift and drag are functions of airspeed, so they are greatest immediately upon touchdown and decrease over the remaining landing roll. As lift decreases, weight on wheels increases causing rolling friction to increase. Drag and rolling friction will decelerate the airplane to a safe taxi speed. D + FR - T is called the net decelerating force.

TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE An equation for determining minimum takeoff distance is:

W gpSC Where:

= Takeoff distance p = Air density D = Drag

STO

lMAX

2

(T-D-FR)

W=Weight S = Surface area FR = Rolling Friction

g = Gravity T = Thrust

Weight is the greatest factor in determining takeoff distance. Looking at the takeoff distance formula, we see that doubling the weight will increase the takeoff distance four times. Increasing weight requires greater lift and a higher takeoff velocity. It also increases rolling friction which decreases the net accelerating force. Most takeoff and landing performance charts use density altitude (OA) to account for air density. Increasing DA (decreasing air density) requires a higher takeoff velocity and decreases the amount of thrust our engine can provide. This will decrease the acceleration on the takeoff roll and increase the minimum takeoff distance. There are three major factors that decrease density: increasing airfield elevation, increasing air temperature, and increasing humidity. Note that takeoff indicated airspeed remains constant, regardless of temperature, humidity, and elevation. Along with weight, these three density factors make up the 4-H club: high. hot. heavy. and humid. The members of the 4-H club are the worst conditions for takeoff and landing. Whenever three or more of the 4-H club are present, expect extended takeoff and landing distances. Under extreme circumstances, two or even one of the factors may cause longer takeoff and landing distances. Using high lift devices. such as flaps or BLC. will decrease the t.akeoff distance. High lift devices decrease both the indicated and true takeoff speeds. Since true airspeed for takeoff decreases, the ground speed during takeoff will decrease, thus decreasing takeoff distance.

1.12-5

A headwind will decrease the takeoff distance by reducing the ground speed associated with the takeoff velocity. Conversely, a tail wind will increase takeoff distance since it increases ground speed . LANDING PERFORMANCE

Landing is essentially the reverse of takeoff. The takeoff equation requires only slight modifications to be applicable to landing.

S U JG

gpSC1MAX (F:I + D - T)

The primary consideration in landing is dissipation of the airplane's kinetic energy. Any factor affecting velocity must be considered when trying to reduce the landing distance. Final approach is flown at the lowest velocity feasible. Notice that in the landing distance equation the net accelerating forces are reversed. Drag and rolling friction are now desirable and of course, thrust is not. An increase in weight will increase landing distance since a greater airspeed is required to support the airplane. An increase in elevation, temperature or humidity will increase landing distance since the reduced density results in a higher landing velocjty. High lift devices decrease landing distance because they reduce the ground speed during the landing. A headwind reduces landing distance because it reduces ground speed. A tailwind increases landing distance since it increases ground speed. Charts for predicting takeoff and landing distance are located in the NATOPS manual for each US Navy aircraft ("Oash-1" for USAF aircraft). The net decelerating force can be increased by use of three different techniques. Aerodynamic braking is accomplished by increasing the parasite drag on the airplane by holding a constant pitch attitude after touchdown and exposing m ore of the airp'ane's surface to the relative wind. This method of braking helps to reduce wear on the brakes. Drag chutes, spoilers, and speed brakes are also considered aerodynamic braking. Aerodynamic braking is used at the beginning of the landing roll. Aerodynamic breaking can also be used in flight to reduce airspeed or increase descent rates when necessary. Mechanical braking (also called frictional or wheel braking) is effective only after enough weight is transferred to the wheels and the airplane has slowed sufficiently. A common procedure is to raise flaps or use spoilers to decrease lift and transfer the airplane's weight to the wheels when transitioning from aerodynamic to mechanical braking. Mechanical braking is used toward the end of the landing roll.

1.12-6

Some airplanes use reverse thrust or reverse pitch propellers (called beta) to shorten the landing roll. Thrust is usually negligible after touchdown, but in the case of reverse thrust or "beta" equipped airplanes, thrust increases the net decelerating force.

CROSSWINDS Since winds do not always blow directly down the runway, the possibility of a crosswind takeoff or landing exists. The rudder is the primary means of maintaining directional control in order to compensate for the crosswind during takeoff or landing . Since the rudder loses effectiveness at low airspeeds, the nosewheel steering of the T37 and the self centering feature of the T-34 nosewheel provides additional directional stability, if thenosewheel is contacting the runway. This enables the pilot to maintain directional control until the rudder becomes effective at higher airspeeds. The pilot must also place the ailerons into the wind during a crosswind t~keoff or landing. The ailerons are not used to maintain directional control, but to overcome the lateral stability that is trying to roll the airplane away from the sideslip relative wind (crosswind). NATOPS and the Oash-1 both contain a Takeoff/Landing Crosswind chart which allows the pilot to determine the minimum safe airspeed that the nosewheel may leave the runway during takeoff, or the minimum airspeed at which the nosewheel must return to the runway following a landing. Lifting the nosewheel below the minimum nosewheel liftoff/touchdown (NWLOITD) speed may cause the airplane to weathercock or weathervane into the wind and possibly run off the runway! Many airplanes have maximum crosswind limits that are based upon minimum nosewheelliftoff/touchdown speed . The major consideration for determining maximum authorized crosswind components is the ability to maintain directional control at low speeds . Maximum crosswind component for a takeoff or landing in the T-34C with fullflaps is 15 knots, and with no-flaps is 22 knots. Maximum crosswind components for the T-37 depend on runway conditions. On icy runways or with standing water, the T-37 is limited to 10 knots, on wet runways-1 3 knots, and on dry runways--17.5 knots. For variable or gusting winds, alwa,ys use the maximum wind angle and the maximum gust velocity given to determine the crosswind component.

GROUND EFFECT A phenomenon, known as ground effect, significantly reduces induced drag and increases effective lift when the airplane is within one wingspan of the ground. Because takeoffs and landings are conducted at low airspeeds, induced drag makes up a large portion of the total drag on the airplane. As an airplane nears the ground, the downwash at the trailing edge of the wing is unable to flow downward. The decrease in downwash allows the total lift vector to rotate forward, increasing effective lift and decreasing induced drag. When the aircraft is one wingspan above the ground (about 33 feet for T34 or T-37) induced drag is reduced by only 1.4%, at one-fourth the wingspan, induced 1.12-7

drag is reduced by 23.5%. and a maximum reduction of 60% occurs just prior to touchdown or after liftoff (Figure 1.12-2). Because of the increased lift. it is possible to get airborne at an airspeed below normal flying speed. As an airplane takes off and leaves ground effect. induced drag increases and lift decreases. which could cause an altitude loss, possibly resulting in an unintentional gear-up landing. Entering ground effect (during landing) increases effective lift and decreases induced drag by preventing the aft inclination of the lift vector. When the plane enters ground effect it will float down the runway if the pilot does not reduce thrust. The timing of the flare and power reduction when in ground effect is the most difficult aspect of the landing phase for most students.

AIRPLANE OUT OF GROUND EfFECT

AIAPlANE tN GROUND EFFECT

:::.tJ-i~ ~ ,@~,=-"~ REDUCED t:XJWNWASH

AEDUC&D WlNG11P VORTICES

Fiaure 1 .12·2 Ground Effect HYDROPLANING Hydroplaning causes the airplane's tires to skim atop a thin layer of water on a runway. If there is standing water in excess of 0.1 inches. hydroplaning may occur. Deeper tread or "channels" that allow water to escape while the tire contacts the runway may require as much as 2 inches of water before hydroplaning occurs. The speed for normal dynamic hydroplaning can be found using the formula below.

v

h.vdrYJplane

= 9· ~Itire pressre 1.12-8

At first thought, one might think that a heavier airplane would require a faster speed before hydroplaning could occur, but experiments have shown this speed to be independent of weight. Weight only determines the size of the "foot print" that the tire makes. A heavier airplane makes a larger foot print, but the weight supported per square inch of the tire is the same. Weight has no effect on the velocity that an airplane will hydroplane, but a heavier airplane must takeoff and land at higher speeds which increases the possibility of hydroplaning. If you suspect hydroplaning , you must avoid the use of frictional brakes, since their use may cause you to lose directional control. Beta settings should be used as much as possible to slow or stop the T-34. Hydroplaning of the T-37 main landing gear tires occurs at apgroximately 9'2 knots. To minimize the effects of hydronplaning . aircrews should consider factors such as tire condition , touchdown speeds and runway condition when operating on a wet runway . Table 1.12-1 gives the tire pressure and approximate hydroplaning speeds for the landing gear of the T-34 and T-37. NOSEWHEEL

MAIN LANDING GEAR

Pressure

V IiYDROPLANE

Pressure

V1iYDR00000E

T-34C

70 psi

75 kts

90 psi

85 kts

T-378

75 psi

78 kts

110 psi

92 kts

Table 1.12-1 Hydroplaning Speeds WAKE TURBULENCE The spanwise airflow that moves around the wingtip does more than just create induced drag, it also creates wingtip vortices. Wingtip vortices are spiraling mass'e s of air that are formed at the wingtip when an airplane produces lift (Figure 1.12-3). This disturbance is often called "jetwash" or ''wake turbulence". Flying into another aircraft's vortices can lead to a variety of dangerous situations including structural damage. Vortices may instantly change the direction of the relative wind and cause one or both wings of the trailing airplane to stall. or disrupt airflow in the engine inlet inducing a compressor stall.

1.12-9

The most common hazard to another airplane is associated with the rolling moments that can exceed the roll control capability of the airplane. Counter control is usually effective and induced roll is least in cases where the wingspan and ailerons of the encountering airplane extend beyond the rotational flow of the vortex. It is more difficult for airplanes with short wingspans (compared with the vortex generating airplane) to counter the imposed roll. Pilots of short wingspan airplanes, even of the high performance type, must be especially alert to vortex encounters. The most significant factor affecting your ability to counteract the roll induced by the vortices is the relative wingspan between the two airplanes.

Figure 1.12-3 Wake Turbulence

Since vortices are a by-product of lift,. they are generated from the moment an airplane rotates for takeoff until the airplane nosewheel touches down for landing. Tests show that vortices cover an area about 2 wingspans in width and one in height. They sink at a rate of 400 to 500 feet per minute and level off about 900 feet below the flight path of the generating airplane. Vortices will lose strength and break up after a few minutes (Figure 1.12-4). Atmospheric turbulence will accelerate this breakup. Once in contact with the ground, vortices move laterally at about 5 knots. A crosswind of 4 to 6 knots may cause one vortex to remain stationary over a line on the surface, while the other vortex will move at a rate of 6 to 10 knots. This may result in the upwind vortex remaining in the touchdown zone, and the downwind vortex drifting over a parallel runway. Use caution when operating on parallel runways less than 2, 500 feet apart.

~"

'-..---.~

...

WIND

/

Figure 1.12-4 Vortex Lateral Movement

1.12-10

The strength of a vortex depends on three main factors: airplane weight, airplane speed, and the shape of the wing. To maintain level flight, a heavier airplane must produce more lift, and will therefore have a greater pressure differential at the wingtip where the vortex is created. A faster airplane will stretch the vortex over a longer distance. If the flaps are lowered, more lift is created at the wing root, which decreases the pressure differential at the wingtip. The greatest vortex strength occurs when the generating airplane is HEAVY, SLOW, and CLEAN . Because weight is the most significant factor in the strength of wingtip vortices, the FAA has divided aircraft into three weight classes: Small aircraft (0 to 12,500 Ibs), large aircraft (12,500 to 300,000 Ibs), and heavy aircraft (300,000 Ibs or more). The FAA requires heavy aircraft to use the word "heavy" in all radio communications. . Flight control movements during encounters with wake turbulence tend to become instinctive, and recovery usually depends on factors other than pilot reaction. Therefore, the most important pilot technique for survival during wake turbulence Is to avoid it. Prior to takeoff or landing, pilots should note the rotation or touchdown point of the preceding airplane and observe FAA separation intervals between landing and departing airplanes. Separation criteria varies from four to six miles according to the relative airplane sizes. For the Air Force, use a minimum of 2 minutes spacing when taking off behind a large or heavy aircraft and use 2 minute spacing minimum landing behind a large aircraft or 3 minute spacing behind a heavy aircraft. To determine the actual criteria for your airplane, refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual or appropriate regulations. The following vortex avoidance procedures are recommended by the FAA.

------..J _I

A

.L'

B

c D Figure 1.12-5 Vortex Avoidance

1.12-11

When landing behind a larger airplane , stay at or above the larger airplane's final approach path and land beyond its touchdown point (Figure 1.12-5a). You should ensure that an interval of at least two minutes has elapsed before conducting a takeoff after a larger airplane has landed, or you can perform a "midfield takeoff' that begins beyond the larger aircraft's touchdown point (Figure 1.12-5d). If a larger airplane performs a touch-and-go or low approach, observe the same two minute interval. When a larger airplane is departing ahead of you. ensure your landing or takeoff rotation is complete prior to the larger airplane's point of rotation (Figure 1.12-5c&d). If departing, conduct your climb-out to remain above his flight path and upwind until you turn clear (Figure 1.12-5b). You should be aware of another hazard since it occurs well clear of the runway. Whenever a helicopter is in a hover, tremendous amounts of rotor downwash are produced . For this reason, small airplanes should avoid operating within three rotor diameters of any hovering helicopter (Figure 1.12-6) . In forward flight. treat any helicopter as you would an airplane of similar size and weight.

Figure 1.12-6 Hovering Helicopter During formation flying and in-flight refueling, airplanes close to one another produce a mutual interference especially when the trailing airplane is slightly aft and below the lead airplane. The leading airplane experiences an effect that is similar to ground effect because of a reduction in downwash and induced drag. For the second airplane, this mutual interference of the flow pattern can instantaneously alter the direction of the relative wind that the airfoils are sensing. Flying through lead's f1ightpath will place you in his wake turbulence which could cause an over g or a flameout.

1.12-12

WHAT IS WIND SHEAR? Wind shear is defined as a sudden change in wind direction and/or speed over ~ short distance in the atmosphere. Wind shear is most often caused by jet streams. land or sea breezes. fronts. inversions and thunderstorms. When we discuss wind shear we are really talking about the boundary between bodies of air which have different wind characteristics. These boundaries of air can exist in the vertical or horizontal plane and vary in intensity. Weak shears distribute the wind change from one body of air to the other gradually. A pilot flying through this type of shear may not even notice a change in aircraft performance. On the other hand, strong shears distribute the wind abruptly creating rapid changes in aircraft performance. EFFECTS OF HORIZONTAL WIND SHEAR ON AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE Wind shears can be very complex combinations of wind velocities. Usually the more complex the wind shear, the more difficult it is for the pilot to react correctly, To simplify things we will limit our discussion in this section to horizontal wind shears so that we may gain a basic understanding of how wind shear will affect aircraft performance. Wind shears change airflow over the aircraft. The velocity of the relative wind can be altered causing immediate changes in the indicated airspeed and/or angle attack of the aircraft. Once the aircraft is stabilized in the body of air it behaves as if nothing happened. You have probably experiel1ced this effect while riding on a moving sidewalk or escalator. As you step onto these moving surfaces you feel a little unstable for a few seconds. Shortly thereafter, you stabilize and function normally. The only difference is your "groundspeed" is now a little faster. If we confine ourselves to the horizontal plane, we can say wind shear either causes an increases or decrease in aircraft performance. With ampte airspeed and altitude, wind shear does not pose a serious threat. However during slow airspeed and low altitude operations, such as during takeoffs and landings. wind shear becomes hazardous. WIND SHEAR DURING TAKEOFF INCREASING PERFORMANCE WIND SHEAR: Figure 1.12-7 shows an aircraft passing through a wind shear which increases indicated airspeed 20 knots. The increase in lAS results in an increase in lift and therefore causes an initial increase in performance. During takeoff we maintain a constant attitude until reaching climb airspeed. Therefore, as long as a proper climb attitude is maintained, a wind shear with a headwind component on takeoff does not pose a serious threat.

1.12-13

..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....

2S ttl .

~

...... SHEAR LEVBL

5 tlS.

......

......

•

......

..... .....

, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- =-.. - . - - - - . . - - .

Figure 1.12-7 Increasing Performance Wind Shear DECREASING AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE: Figure 1.12-8 shows an aircraft entering a shear which decreases the indicated airspeed 25 knots. This causes a significant decrease in performance. If you were just about to raise the gear at 100 knots your airspeed would drop to 75 knots as the shear was entered. A rapid drop of airspeed will surely require the utmost skill to maintain aircraft control. An increase in angle of attack in this situation will probably result in an approach to stall indication and possibly a stall. The above example illustrates how shear can be dangerous during a decreasing performance wind

......

......

..... ......

......

......

5 ttl .

-...--._

.... SHEAR LEVEL ......

......

30 kts. "\:_

-

•

-

-

-

...... -

-

-

...... ..... -

-

-

-

-

oft - :

_

~

_

Figure 1.12-8 Decreasing Performance Wind Shear 1.12-14

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

•

_

•

WIND SHEAR DURING LANDING

15;<~-.. ~

_ TAJ _L_W_IN_D_ _ _... ~

~

~

~

~

Uft Increases . nose pIt ches uP. aircraft rises above glJdeslope

::-...

ZERO WIND

HEADWIND

o

,

Figure 1.12-9 Increasing Performance Wind Shear An aircraft established on a glide path for landing is usually trimmed for a constant airspeed descent. Any change in indicated airspeed will cause a change in pitch due to trim and a change in the rate of descent. The pilot will have to make some control inputs to maintain the desired glide path. Again, let's look at the specific impact the wind shear has on the approach and landing. INCREASING PERFORMANCE WIND SHEAR: Figure 1.12-9 shows an aircraft descending through a shear which increases its indicated airspeed . Notice that the transition from a tailwind to zero wind causes an increase in performance. This shear causes the aircraft to pitch up and rise above the glidepath. The pilot counters this by reducing the power and lowering the nose. However. the pilot may over correct and descend below the glidepath. Once back on glidepath, a higher power setting will be required to compensate for the slower ground speed (new rate of descent) within the new body of air. For the purpose of comparing relative power settings, let's assume we have a hypothetical thrust scale of 1 to 10, and the normal no-wind power setting is 6. Because of the tailwind (higher groundspeed) above the shear, the pilot needs a power setting of 5 to maintain the glidepath. When the aircraft crosses the shear and begins to rise above glidepath. the pilot reduces power to 4. As the aircraft returns to glidepath, a power setting of 6 will be required to maintain the glide path. This is due to the lower rate of descent required by a slower groundspeed. Notice that a higher power setting is required after the shear than before the shear to maintain the glidepath. In other words, you must eventually add more power than was removed to stabilize on the glidepath.

1.12-15

lift ancreases, nose pilches up, iljrcnrll rrs-es abOVt' ghdeslop

•

Piiol reduces power 10 reduce speed . noses over 10 retum to ghoeslo e

HE.A.DWlND

_-'Y

Oesce"t below glide path oceuI'S. Engane spool-up requires lime P,lot aclion 15 100 late.

Figure 1.12-10 Increasing Performance Wind Shear The above example assumed the shear level was high enough above the ground for the pilot to reestablish the glide path. However, the shear might be low enough to cause a short landing (Figure 1.12-10) . DECREASING PERFORMANCE WIND SHEAR: Figure 1.12-11 shows an aircraft descending through a shear which decreases its indicated airspeed. This shear causes the aircraft to pitch down and descend below the glide path. The pilot counters this by adding power and raising the nose. However, the pilot may over correct and rise above the glide path. Once back on glide path, a lower power setting will be required to compensate for the higher ground speed and new rate of descent within the new body of air. Again using our thrust scale of 1 to 10, we can examine the power requirements during during this type of shear.

• u, .....,...... pole"', .......1 .......1_

ZERO

~_

•

..... lIe"

WINO

DEeRE HEJ.,I;

U~G

I

4

Figure 1.12-11 Decreasing Performance Wind Shear 1.12-16

Let's assume the normal no-wind power setting of 6. Because of the headwind above the shear, the pilot needs a power setting of 7 to maintain the glide path. Then the aircraft crosses the shear and begins to descend below glide path, the pilot increases power to 8 or 9. As the aircraft returns to glide path, a power setting of 6 will be required to maintain it. Again, this is because of the higher rate of descent dictated by a higher groundspeed. The point to remember is that you must eventually reduce power by more than the amount added to stabilize on the glide path. If a strong decreasing performance wind shear is encountered at very low altitude. a pilot may have insufficient time and power to overcome the resulting loss of lift (Figure 1.12-12). The outcome will invariably be a crash short of the runway.

~o ______________~~~-----------------------

w.r:

I AI W I ~ D

PIIOI at. . ill" Ill • . ille'"

er.."'. IIIOtI

cfllle_y

---P

Figure 1.12-12 DecreaSing Performance Wind Shear RECOVERY TECHNIQUES The best technique for dealing with wind shear is to avoid it. If a moderate to strong wind shear is expected, delay your takeoff or landing until the shear condition no longer exists. Anytime wind shear is experienced, pilots should consider going around. If airborne and unable to delay, consider diverting to a place with more favorable conditions. If diverting is not possible or wind shear is inadvertently encountered, the following techniques can be used to minimize the effects:

1.12-17

DECREASING PERFORMANCE WIND SHEAR: 1. Increase approach speeds by the amount of the shear potential (within aircraft limits). 2. Be aware that increased landing speed increases landing distance.

3. If a go around is necessary, establish a nose up attitude and apply maximum power. INCREASING PERFORMANCE WIND SHEAR: '1. Do not increase approach speeds. The shear will cause an increase in airspeed and lift. 2. When the shear is encountered , resist the temptation to make a large power reduction. Accept higher indicated airspeed and use pitch and trim to regain the glidepath. 3. If forced into a long. fast landing on a short runway, go around if unable to land in the touch down zone. These techniques should help you contend with moderate wind shears that cannot be avoided. However, strong shears like those associated with microburst activity must be avoided. An aircraft encountering a microburst can experience significant increases followed by decreases in indicated airspeed. These can occur in a relatively short period and severely impair an aircraft's ability to maintain controlled flight. When encountering unexpected wind shears, avoid high sink rates and low power settings. Also, resist the temptation to make large power reductions. It is important to give a PI REP after any wind shear encounter. When able, report the net change in indicated airspeed that resulted from the shear . . METHODS OF DETECTION Because wind shear is such a dangerous phenomenon, early detection is vital to mishap prevention. In most wind shear accidents there have been warning signs that were ignored, misinterpreted or misunderstood. You must evaluate the warning signs and make a decision quickly an decisively. Here are some very important clues that indicate the presence of microburst. Visual cues are very important because they help substantiate the information given by the weather briefer. in fact. in many fatal wind shear mishaps the pilot continued the approach or takeoff in visible and known thunderstorm conditions. Visual cues include virga. localized blowing dust (especially in circular or elliptical patterns). rain 1.12-18

shafts with rain diverging away from the core of the cell. and of course an indication of lightning or tornado-like activity. Wind Shear Alert Systems are another source of information about potential wind shear activity. There are several types in operation today at many civilian fields , especially those with a history of strong winds. For example the Low Level Wind Shear Alert System (LLWAS) measures the wind speed and direction at several points on the ground and compares them with a reference sensor located near the center of the airfield , Because of the small diameter of microbursts, many may go undetected. When they are detected, they are on the field and it may be too late. There are also some doppler radar systems which show greater accuracy in wind shear warnings. A NEXRAD doppler radar system is a ground based radar that can very accurately detect microburst activity. Systems onboard modern aircraft monitor changes in wind velocity and aircraft acceleration to provide wind shear warning and pitch guidance to help escape wind shear. Unfortunately, these systems are not on our trainer aircraft. PI REPS (Pilot Reports) and Weather Alerts are one of the best sources of wind shear information. If you encounter wind shear, it is imperative that you make a PIREP to approach control or tower so they may notify other aircrews. Your PIREP should include the location where the shear was encountered, an estimate of its magnitude and most importantly a description of what was experienced, such as turbulence, airspeed gain or loss, glidepath problems, etc. Departure or, arrival weather reports calling for gusty winds, heavy rain or thunderstorms should be a clue that a hioh potential for microburst activity exists. When you receive your pre-flight briefing or call ahead for an en route update, be alert for any convective activity that might be building. It is important to remember that weather changes very quickly. The best briefing may not prepare you for every situation that you may encounter. It's important to understand that each piece of evidence is cumulative and as more indicators become present the potential for microburst wind shear activity increases.

1.12-19

STUDY QUESTIONS Takeoff and Landing Performance Wake Turbulence and Wind Shear

1,

Indicate the effect of each of the following fact ors on takeoff and landing true and indicated airspeeds.

VTO

VLOG

IASTO

IASLDG

Weight t Altitude

t

Headwind High Lift Devices

2.

State the forces acting on an airplane during takeoff roll. Which one is most unbalanced?

3.

What is rolling friction? What variables determine rolling friction and the coefficient of friction? When is rolling friction greatest?

4.

What are the factors that effect takeoff and landing.

5.

What variable has the single greatest effect on the minimum distance required to takeoff or land?

6.

What is the effect of an increase in altitude on takeoff distance? Temperature?

1.12-20

· 7.

What will an increase in humidity do to landing distance?

8.

If an airplane takes off with a tailwind, takeoff distance would ____ , true airspeed would and ground speed would _ __

9.

What are the worst conditions for takeoff?

10.

Using a drag chute to increase drag is an example of _____ braking.

11.

Given the following runway winds, check the types of landings that are allowed in T-34C. Runway Headwind Crosswind A

25

0

B

21 .5

12.5

C

12.5

21 .5

D

0

25

Full Flap

No Flap

i ,

12.

What are the three crosswind limitations in the T-37B for dry, wet and icy/standing water runway conditions?

13.

What is the effect of ground effect on total lift, effective lift, induced drag, total drag, and thrust required?

1.12-21

14.

With inches of standing water on the runway, a pilot should utilize BETA or aerodynamic braking to slow the airplane prior to wheel braking. This procedure will greatly reduce the risk of _ _ _ _ __

15.

What hazard to flight is the result of the increase in downwash caused by spanwise flow around the wingtip on a finite wing?

16.

Wingtip vortices will cover an area approximately wide and _______ high. They will be strongest when the generating aircraft is ____________ ,and _ _ _ _ __

17.

When taking off behind a heavy aircraft in a T-34 or T-37, you should allow for a minimum spacing of minute(s).

18.

What should a pilot do to avoid a larger airplane's wake turbulence during landing?

19.

What should a pilot do to avoid a hovering helicopter's wake turbulence during ground taxi operation?

20.

Which of the following telltale signs in the vicinity of thunderstorms should alert you to the possibility of microburst activity?

a. b.

Roll clouds Blowing dust

c. d.

Gusty conditions All of the above

21.

While waiting number 1 for takeoff, tower informs you that a landing aircraft just reported a 20 knot decrease in airspeed due to wind shear at approximately 100 feet AGL. What should you do?

22.

During an approach, you expect a decreasing performance shear of about 20 knots at 200-300 feet AGL. How can you minimize the effects of this shear?

23.

How can you determine if a wind shear exists?

24.

An aircraft reported wind shear on final with a 10 knot loss of airspeed. How should you adjust your approach and what things should you look out for?

1.12-22

APPENDIX Glossary Appendix No. 1.A absolute altitude The aircraft's height above the terrain directly beneath the aircraft, measured in feet above ground level (AGL). Absolute altitude is found by subtracting the terrain elevation from the true altitude.

adverse pressure gradient A pressure gradient of increasing static pressure in the direction of airflow.

absolute ceiling The maximum altitude above sea level in a standard atmosphere that an airplane can maintain level flight.

aerodynamic balance The feature of a control surface that reduces the magnitude of the aerodynamic moment around the hingeline. See shielded hom.

accelerated spin A spin in which the control stick is not held in the full aft position. An accelerated spin is characterized by steeper pitch attitudes and higher spin rates. accelerated stall A stall in which the load factor is greater than one, as in a pullout. Usually more violent and disorienting than.a normal stall. accelerated stall line A curved line describing the number of g's that can be generated at a given indicated airspeed as a function of CUMx angle of attack for a particular airfoil. Also called line of maximum lift. acceleration A change in the velocity of a body with respect to magnitude or direction, or both.

adverse yaw Yaw in the opposite direction of aileron roll input.

aerodynamic braking A technique for slowing an airplane to a speed suitable for frictional braking. AerodynamiC braking is accomplished by increasing the surface area exposed to the relative wind in order to increase parasite drag, primarily by holding the nose of the airplane in the landing attitude. aerodynamic center (AC) The point along the chordUne of an airfoil where all changes in aerodynamic force effectively take place. It is normally located at the point of 25% chord. aerodynamic force (AF) A force acting on an airfoil that is the result of air pressure and friction distribution over the surface of the airfoil.

accelerometer An instrument that measures one or more components of the acceleration of a vehicle.

1.A-1

aerodynamics The science that studies the motion of gaseous fluid flows, and of their actions against and around bodies, and of the forces acting on bodies within that flow. aerodynamic twist Form of wing tailoring that employs a decrease in camber from wing root to wingtip. The wing root is more positively cambered than the tip, resulting in a root first stall pattern. Also called section variation. aileron A movable control surface, attached to the wing of an airplane, used to produce a rolling moment around the longitudinal axis by creating unequal lifting forces on opposite sides of an airplane. aileron reversal Reversal of the control effect usually produced by an aileron, caused by a moment around the aerodynamic center twisting the wing and changing its angle of attack. aircraft (AlC) Any device used or intended to be used for flight in the air. airflow A flow or stream of air. A rate of flow measured by mass per unit time. airfoil A streamlined shape designed to produce lift as it moves through the air. airframe The structural components of an airplane including the framework and skin of such parts as the fuselage, wings, empennage, landing gear, and engine mounts. airplane An engine driven, heavier-thanfixed-wing aircraft that is air,

supported by the dynamic reaction of air110w over its wings. altimeter Any instrument for measuring altitude. An instrument similar to an aneroid barometer that uses the change of atmospheric pressure with altitude to indicate the approximate elevation above a given reference. altitude The height of a point, measured from a reference plane, such as mean sealevel. ambient Pertaining to the air or air conditions around a flying aircraft but undisturbed or unaffected by it. aneroid barometer An instrument for measuring the pressure of the atmosphere which operates on the principle of having changing atmospheric pressure bend a metallic surface which, in tum, moves a pointer across a scale grac;juated in units of pressure. angle of attack (AOA, a) The angle formed between the relative wind and the chordline of the airfoil angle of bank (AOe, cjl) The angle between the horizon and the lateral axis of an aircraft. The angle of lateral displacement (roll) of an aircraft, especially in making a tum angle .of climb (AOC, y) The angle between .the horizon and the f1ightpath of a climbing aircraft. angle of descent (y) The angle between the horizon and the f1ightpath of a descending aircraft.

1.A-2

angle of incidence The angle between the airplane's longitudinal axis and the chordline of its wing. The root chord is commonly chosen to measure the angle of incidence.

autorotation During a spin, the combination of roll and yaw that is self sustaining.

angular acceleration Rate of change of angular velocity.

average chord (c) The geometric average of every chord from the wing root to the wingtip. Also called mean geometric chord.

anhedral angle A negative dihedral angle. Also called cathedral ang.le.

axis A reference line passing through a body, around which the body rotates.

approach A specified flightpath and associated altitudes to be flown in preparation for a landing, especially a published instrument approach.

axis system A set of three mutually perpendicular axes, intersecting at the center of gravity of an aircraft, around which the motions, moments, and forces of roll, pitch, and yaw are measured.

artificial feel A method of simulating, altering, or otherwise enhanCing the feedback or control feel that is transmitted to the cockpit controls by the forces acting on the control surfaces.

bank The position or attitude of an aircraft when its lateral axis is inclined from the horizontal.

=

attitude The orientation of an aircraft as determined by the relationship between its axes and some reference line or plane. Usually refers to nose attitude or pitch attitude.

Bernoulli's Equation HT Ps + q. (After Daniel Bernoulli, 1700-1782, Swiss scientist.) In aerodynamics, a law or theorem stating that in a flow of incompressible fluid, the sum of the static pressure and the dynamic pressure along a streamline is constant if gravity and frictional effects are disregarded.

automatic slot High lift device that consists of a movable vane attached to the leading edge of the wing that moves away from the body of the wing to allow airflow from below the wing to reach the upper surface and reenergize the boundary layer, delaying boundary layer separation. See slat.

boundary layer The layer of airflow over the surface of an airfoil, which shows local airflow retardation caused by viscosity. The boundary layer is very thin at the leading edge of an airfoil (about 1 mm) and grows in thickness as it moves over a body. It is composed of laminar flow and turbulent flow.

aspect ratio (AR) The ratio of the wingspan to the average chord.

1.A-3

boundary layer control (BLC) The control of the airflow within the boundary layer in order to prevent its separation at high angles of attack. See also slot and slat. buffeting The beating, shaking, or oscillation of an aircraft's structure or surfaces by an unsteady flow, gusts, turbulence, etc. cabin Compartment of an aircraft in which passengers, troops, or cargo are loaded. calibrated airspeed (CAS) Indicated airspeed corrected for instrument error. calibrated altitude Indicated altitude corrected for instrument error. camber The curvature of the mean line of an airfoil from leading edge to trailing edge; the amount of this curvature. cantilever A beam or object supported only at or near one end, or one point; without external bracing. cathedral See anhedral. center of gravity (CG) The point at which the weight of an object is considered ·to be concentrated. chord A measure of the chord line from the leading edge to the trailing edge of an airfoil. The chord may vary in length from the wingtip to wing root. The root chord, cR, is the chord at the wing centerline and the tip chord, Cr, is measured at the wingtip.

chordline An infinitely long, straight line drawn through the leading and trailing edges of an airfoil. chordwise flow Airflow perpendicular to the leading edge of an airfoil; airflow along the chord of .an airfoil. Since chordwise flow is accelerated over a wing, it produces lift. cockpit Compartment of an aircraft in which the flight crew, especially the pilot(s), are located. The cockpit is where the aircraft is controlled from. coefficient of aerodynamic force (C F) The dimensionless portion of the aerodynamic force that is a function of angle of attack, camber, aspect ratio, compressibility, and viscosity. coefficient of drag (CD) The dimensionless portion of the total drag on an airfoil that is dependent on the same variables that affect CF• coefficient of friction (J.1) A dimensionless number whose value depends primarily on the type of material and condition of the two surfaces that are in contact. coefficient of lift (C L) The dimensionless portion of the total lift on an airfoil that is dependent on the same variables that affect CF• compressibility The property of a substance that allows its density to increase as pressure increases.

1.A-4

compressible flow Flow at speeds sufficiently high that density changes in the fluid can no longer be neglected. constant-speed propeller A propeller designed to maintain engine speed at a constant RPM, automatically increasing or decreasing pitch as engine ·speed tends to increase or decrease. continuity equation p,A,V, = P,A2V2. Principle of physics that states that for fluids, the mass flow rate has the same value at every position along a closed tube. control feel The feel or impression of the stability and control of an aircraft that a pilot receives through the cockpit controls, either from aerodynamic forces acting on the control surfaces or from devices simulating these aerodynamic forces. control force A force, either aerodynamic or pilot induced, acting on a control surface. control horn A short lever or rigid post attached to a control surface, to which a control cable, wire, line, or rod is attached. controllability The capability of an aircraft to respond to control inputs, especially in direction or attitude.

ailerons by a side-to-side movement. control surface A movable airfoil or surface, such as an aileron, elevator, rudder, or spoiler used to control the attitude or motion of an airplane and to guide it through the air. cosine (cos) In a right triangle, the function of an acute angle that is the ratio of the length of the adjacent side to the length of the hypotenuse. creep The gradual reduction in a material's strength over time due to high temperature and stress. Also known as plastic deformation. critical altitude The maximum altitude at which, in the standard atmosphere, an engine produces its sea level rated horsepower or torque. critical Mach number (MeRIT) The free airstream Mach number that produces the first evidence of local sonic flow. crosswind A wind blowing across the flightpath of an airplane. density (p) Mass per unit volume. density altitude (DA) Density altitude is pressure altitude corrected for nonstandard temperature. Density altitude is the pressure altitude on a standard day that has the same density as the ambient air.

control stick A lever for controlling the movements of an aircraft in flight. On a fixed-wing airplane, the control stick operates the elevators by a fore-and-aft movement and the

1.A-5

dihedral angle The angle between the spanwise inclination of a wing and the lateral axis. It is the upward slope of the wings when viewed from head on. A negative dihedral is called anhedral.

dutch roll Dynamic stability that is the result of strong lateral and weak directional static stability. An airplane prone to dutch roll would appear to describe a figure eight on the horizon and would tail wag.

directional control Control of the longitudinal axis around the vertical axis; yaw control.

dynamic pressure (q) The pressure of a fluid resulting from its motion, equal to one half the density times the velocity squared (q=1/2p\f).

directional divergence A departure from equilibrium around the vertical axis caused by negative directional static stability. Condition of flight in which the reaction to a small initial sideslip is an increase in sideslip angle. This would result in the airplane yawing broadside to the relative wind. directional moment A moment created around an aircraft's vertical axis. directional stability The stability of an aircraft around its vertical axis. The reaction of an aircraft to a sideslip. dive A steep descent, usually power on. downwash Chordwise airflow from the upper surface of an airfoil passing downward behind the trailing edge to the lower surface. Downwash decreases the amount of lift produced by the wing. Any downward moving airflow. drag (0) That component of the aerodynamic force acting parallel to, and in the same direction as the relative wind. It acts as a retarding force.

dynamic stability The oscillatory motion of a body, beyond its initial tendency to move toward or away from equilibrium, after a disturbance. A measure of displacement with respect to time. elastic limit The maximum load that may be applied to a component without permanent deformation. elevator A control surface, attached to a horizontal stabilizer that produces a pitching moment around the airplane's lateral axis. empennage The assembly of stabilizing and control surfaces at the tail of an airplane. endurance The length of time that an aircraft can fly under specified conditions without refueling. energy The ability or capacity to do work, expressed in foot-pounds. eqUilibrium Flight condition that exists when the sum of the forces and moments acting around the center of gravity equal zero. The absence of linear or angular acceleration.

1.A-6

equivalent airspeed (EAS) The true airspeed at sea level on a standard day that produces the same dynamic pressure as the actual aircraft condition. It is equal to calibrated airspeed corrected for the compressibility of air. equivalent parasite area (f) The total surface area of an airplane that contributes to parasite drag. Normally less than cross sectional area due to the effects of streamlining. erect spin A spin characterized by positive g's and an upright attitude. fatigue failure The breaking (or serious permanent deformation) of a material due to a cyclic application of load or force. fatigue strength A measure of a material's resistance to a cyclic application of load or force. feathered propeller A propeller whose blades have been rotated so that the leading and trailing edges are nearly parallel with the aircraft flightpath to minimize drag and to stop propeller rotation. feedback The transmission of forces initiated by aerodynamic action on control surfaces to the cockpit controls. The actual forces transmitted to the cockpit controls. fence A stall fence.

the runway in the landing direction. finite wing A wing with a finite span; a wing with wingtips. fixed slot A slot that remains open at all times. flap A high lift device consisting of a hinged, pivoted, or sliding airfoil or plate, or a combination of such objects regarded as a single surface, extended or deflected for increasing camber. Used primarily to decrease the takeoff or landing velocity. flat spin A spin characterized by transverse g's and an attitude flatter than an erect spin. flightpath (FP) The path described by an airplane's center of gravity as it moves through an air mass. flow separation The breakaway of the boundary layer airflow from a surface; the condition of a flow separated from the surface of a body and no longer following its contours. flutter A vibration or oscillation of a control surface or wing created and maintained by aerodynamic forces and the elastic and inertial forces of the object itself. force A vector quantity equal to the push or pull exerted on a body. By Newton's Second Law, a force is a function of an acceleration and the mass of the body.

final I final approach That portion or leg of an approach pattern after the last turn, in which the aircraft is in line with

1.A-7

form drag Drag resulting from airflow over a surface with some frontal area, often referred to as pressure drag, profile drag, or plate drag. fowler flap A high lift device that consists of a sliding airfoil attached to the trailing edge of a wing that increases camber, wing area, and uses BLC to increase the CL • friction Resistance due to the rubbing of one body or substance against another. Air friction results from the viscosity of the air, or its tendency to stick to a surface. friction drag Drag arising from friction forces at the surface of an aircraft, due to the viscosity of the air. fuel flow The rate of fuel being consumed by an aircraft's engine. fuselage The main structural component of an airplane. full-cantilever Supported at one point only, as in a full-cantilever wing, or a wing that is entirely intemally supported, with no external bracing. G

(gravitational acceleration) A constant, equal to 32.2 ftlse~, representing the acceleration on an object due to the Earth's gravity.

General Gas Law P = p R T. Law of physics that shows the relationship between properties of air: pressure (P), density (p), and temperature (n. R is the Universal Gas Constant.

geometric twist Form of wing tailoring that employs a decrease in the angle of incidence from the wing root to the wingtip. The wing root has a higher angle of incidence than the wingtip, causing it to stall first. glide A shallow descent, usually associated with power off flight. glide endurance (GE) The maximum time that an airplane can stay airborne in a glide as a function of weight, altitude, and angle of attack. glide range (GR) The maximum distance that can be traveled in a glide as a function of altitude, wind, and lift to drag ratio. glide ratio The ratio of the horizontal distance traveled to the vertical distance descended in a glide. Glide ratio is equal to the lift to drag ratio. gross weight The total weight of a fully loaded aircraft. ground effect The dramatic reduction of induced drag and thrust required that occurs within one wingspan of the ground or other surface. ground speed (GS) An airplane's actual speed over the ground. gust A sudden and brief change of wind speed or direction. gust load A load imposed upon an aircraft or aircraft member by a gust.

1.A-8

gyroscopic precession The resultant action or deflection of a spinning disc when a force is applied parallel to its axis. The resultant force occurs 90° ahead in the direction of rotation, and in the direction of the applied force. headwind A wind blowing from directly ahead, or blowing from a forward direction such that its principal effect is to reduce ground speed. helicopter A rotorcraft that, for its horizontal motion, depends principally on its engine driven rotors. high lift device Any device, such as a flap, or boundary layer control device, used to increase the lift of a wing by increasing the CL or area of the wing. The result is a reduction of takeoff and landing speeds. Increases in CL are achieved by increasing the camber of an airfoil, or by controlling the kinetic energy in the boundary layer. hingeline The transverse axis around which a control surface moves.

Mach number of 5 or greater. indicated airspeed (lAS) The instrument indication for the amount of dynamic pressure that the aircraft is creating during some given flight condition. Indicated airspeed is displayed in knots, abbreviated KIAS. indicated altitude The indication on a pressure altimeter when the kollsman window is set to the current local altimeter setting. induced drag (01) That portion of total drag resulting from the production of lift. infinite wing A wing with no wingtips; used in discussing airflow around an airfoil in ideal situations. interference drag Drag caused by the mixing of streamlines around aircraft components due to their proximity. It is a form of parasite drag. inverted spin A spin characterized by negative gls and an inverted attitude.

horizontal stabilizer The entire horizontal part of an airplane's empennage comprising both fixed and movable surfaces. On most airplanes, the horizontal stabilizer is the greatest contributor to longitudinal stability.

isothermal layer The layer of the atmosphere from 36,000 feet through approximately 80,000 feet, in which the air remains at a constant temperature of -56.5°C.

horsepower A unit of power equal to 550 ft-Ibs/sec or 33,000 ft-Ibs/min.

kinetic energy (KE) The ability of a body to do work because of its motion.

humidity The amount of water vapor in the air.

laminar flow The portion of the boundary layer airflow that is smooth and unbroken and travels along well defined streamlines.

hypersonic Movement or flow at very high supersonic speeds, generally at a

1.A-9

laminar flow wing An airfoil specially designed to maintain a laminar flow boundary layer.

lift to drag ratio-maximum (UD MAX ) The greatest ratio of lift to drag. UDMAX AOA is the most efficient AOA for that airfoil.

lateral axis An axis going through an airplane's center of gravity from side to side (wingtip to wingtip). Any movement developed around this axis is called pitch.

limit airspeed See redline airspeed.

'lateral control Control of the lateral axis around the longitudinal axis; roll control.

limit load The maximum load factor an airplane can sustain without any possibility of permanent deformation. It is the maximum load factor anticipated in the normal operation of the airplane.

lateral moment A moment created around an airplane's longitudinal axis.

linear acceleration Acceleration along a line or axis.

lateral stability The stability of an aircraft around its longitudinal axis. The reaction of an aircraft to an angle of bank.

load A stress-producing force. load factor (n) The ratio of the load applied by an airplane's lift to the load applied by its weight. It is a multiple of the acceleration of gravity, commonly called "g'S."

leading edge flaps A high lift device consisting of a hinged portion of the leading edge of a wing that moves down to increase the wing's camber.

local speed of sound The speed at which sound travels in a given medium· under local ambient conditions.

leading edge radius The radius of a circle tangent to the leading edge, upper and lower surfaces of the airfoil. lift

longitudinal axis An axis extending from the nose to the ta,1 of an aircraft, passing through its center of gravity. Any movement developed around this axis is called roll.

(L) The component of the aerodynamic force acting perpendicular to the relative wind.

lift to drag ratio (UO) The ratio of lift to drag, obtained by dividing the coefficient of lift by the coefficient of drag. A measure of the wing's efficiency. The UD ratio is also used as the glide ratio.

longitudinal control Control of the longitudinal axis around the lateral axis; pitch control. longitudinal moment A moment created around an airplane's lateral axis.

1.A-10

longitudinal stability The stability of an aircraft around the lateral axis. The reaction of an aircraft to changes in pitch.

mean aerodynamic chord (MAC) The chord of an imaginary rectangular airfoil that would have pitching moments throughout the flight range the same as those of an actual airfoil.

Mach number (M) (Pronounced "mock," after Emest Mach (1838-1916), Austrian sCientist.) The ratio of the true airspeed of an object moving through the air to the local speed of sound in that air.

A line halfway mean camber line between the upper and lower surface of an airfoil. minimum glide angle The smallest angle between the horizon and the f1ightpath of an airplane in a glide.

maneuverability The ability of an airplane to readily alter its f1ightpath. The ease with which an airplane moves out of equilibrium.

moment A tendency to cause rotation around a point or axis, as a control surface around its hinge or an airplane around its center of gravity; the measure of this tendency, equal to the product of the force and perpendicular distance between the point of rotation and the direction of the force., expressed as a vector. Also called torque.

maneuver point The point on the V-n diagram at the intersection of the positive accelerated stall line and the positive limit load. It is the point where the limit load may be achieved without the possibility of overstress, or the lowest airspeed that the limit load is encountered.

moment arm The distance from a point of rotation, perpendicular to the force, over which a force acts to create a moment.

maneuver speed (V.) The indicated airspeed that an airplane can achieve its maximum tum rate and minimum tum radius. The slowest velocity that an airplane can generate its limit load. It is usually the recommended turbulent air penetration airspeed.

monocoque A type of construction, as an airplane fuselage, in which most or all the stresses are carried by the covering or skin.

mass (m) The quantity of molecular material that comprises an object. mass balance The feature of a control surface that reduces the magnitude of the inertial and gravitational moments around the hinge line.

nacelle A streamlined structure or compartment on an aircraft, used as housing for an engine. negative camber airfoil An airfoil in which the mean camber line is below the chordline.

1.A-11

neutral point (NP) The location of the center of gravity of an airplane that would produce neutral longitudinal static stability. The average aerodynamic center for the overall airplane.

associated with the production of lift. phugoid oscillations Oscillations of altitude and airspeed that occur over relatively long periods of time, and are easily controlled by the pilot. Also called phugoid motion.

(The Law of Newton's First Law Equilibrium.) "A body at rest tends to remain at rest and a body in motion tends to remain in motion in a straight line at a constant velocity unless acted upon by some unbalanced force."

pilot induced oscillations (PIO) Oscillations of attitude and angle of attack caused by the pilot trying to stop unwanted aircraft oscillations, or by the instability of the control surfaces. Th~se inputs may result in an increase in the magnitude of the original oscillations.

Newton's Second Law (The Law of Acceleration.) 'The acceleration of a body is directly proportional to the force exerted on the body, is inversely proportional to the mass of the body, and is in the same direction as the force." F m a.

pitch The motion of an aircraft around its lateral axis. Pitch control is achieved through use of elevators or stabilators.

=

Newton's Third Law (The Law of Interaction.) "For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction." nosewheel liftoff I touchdown speed (NWLOITD) The lowest speed that a heading and course along the runway can be maintained with full rudder and ailerons deflected when the nosewheel is off the runway. overstress The condition of possible permanent deformation or damage that results from exceeding the limit load. It also refers to the damage that may occur as a result of exceeding the limit load. Overstress damage will not cause structural failure· of the airframe, but could result in intemal damage to various components. parasite

drag

(Dp)

All

drag

not

pitch angle The angle between the chord line of the rotor blade and the rotors tip path plane; the angle between the propeller blade and the propeller tip path plane. pitch attitude (9) The angle between the longitudinal axis of the airplane and the horizon. pitching moment Any moment around the lateral axis of an airplane. pitot static system A system conSisting of a pitot tube, a static pressure port, and a device that determines the difference, used principally in order to calculate dynamic pressure. plain flap A high lift device.consisting of a hinged airfoil attached to the leading or trailing edge of a wing that increases camber to increase the C l .

1.A-12

planform The outline of an object, such as a wing, as viewed from above.

pressure altitude (PA) Height above the standard datum plane, Le., altitude measured from standard sea level pressure by a barometric altimeter.

positive camber airfoil An airfoil in which the mean camber line is above the chordline.

pressure gradient A change in the pressure of a fluid per unit of distance.

potential energy (PE) The ability of a body to do work because of its position or physical state.

propeller efficiency (p.e.) A measure of the effectiveness of a propeller in converting shaft horsepower into thrust horsepower.

power (P) The rate of doing work, or work per unit time, measured in ft-Ibs/sec or horsepower.

propeller wash The disturbed air produced by the passage of the propeller, usually making a corkscrew path around the airplane.

power available (PA) The power an engine is producing. Power available is a function of PCl setting, density altitude, and velocity.

pullout An act or instance of recovering from a dive.

power cont rol lever (PCl) Control on a propeller driven airplane or helicopter, that adjusts the fuel flow and therefore the power output of the engine(s). Similar to the throttle on a jet aircraft.

radar altimeter Specialized radar transmitter I receiver used to indicate height above terrain. radius of tum (r) See tum radius.

power deficit (Po) The negative difference between power available and power required.

range The distance that an aircraft can travel without refueling.

power excess (Pe) The positive difference between power available and power required.

rate of climb (ROC) The rate at which an aircraft gains altitude. the vertical component of its airspeed in a climb.

power required (P R) The power required to produce enough thrust to overcome drag in level equilibrium flight.

rate of descent (ROD) The rate at which an aircraft loses altitude, the vertical component of its airspeed in a descent. Also called sink rate.

pressure altimeter Aneroid barometers calibrated to indicate altitude in feet instead of pressure.

rate of turn (ID) See turn rate.

1.A-13

roll The motion of an airplane around its longitudinal axis. Roll is controlled by the use of ailerons or spoilers.

red line airspeed (V NE) The maximum permissible airspeed for an airplane. Beyond the redline airspeed, a pilot may experience control problems and structural damage to the aircraft due to aeroelastic effects.

rudder An upright control surface that is deflected to produce a yawing moment, rotating the airplane around its vertical axis.

region of normal command The region of flight at velocities greater than maximum endurance airspeed in which an airplane is in stable equilibrium. That is, if disturbed (slowed down), it tends to return to equilibrium.

safe flight envelope The portion of the V-n diagram that is bounded on the left by the accelerated stall lines, on the top and bottom by the positive and negative limit loads, and on the right by redline airspeed. An aircraft my operate in its safe flight envelope without exceeding its structural or aerodynamic limits.

The region of reversed command region of flight at velocities less than maximum endurance airspeed, in which a greater power setting is required to fly at a lower velocity, due to increased total drag caused by induced drag. Takeoff and landing normally take place while in this region. Also called the "back side of the power curve."

scalar A quantity expressing only magnitude, e.g., time, amount of money, volume of a body.

relative wind (RW) The airflow experienced by the aircraft as it flies through the air. It is always equal and opposite to the flightpath. The relative wind may arise from the motion of the body, from the motion of the air, or from both.

section A cross section of an airfoil taken at right angles to the span axis or some other specified axis of the airfoil. semi-monocoque A type of construction, as of a fuselage or nacelle, in which transverse members and stringers reinforce the skin and help carry the stresses.

reverse thrust Thrust applied to a moving object in a direction opposite to the direction of the object's motion.

shaft horsepower The horsepower delivered at the rotating driveshaft of an engine.

reversibility The ability to transmit aerodynamic forces from the control surfaces to the cockpit controls.

shielded hom The part of a control surface of longer chord than the rest of the surface, lying forward of the hingeline and partially shielded by the surface to which it is attached, used for aerodynamic balance.

1.A-14

shockwave A surface or sheet of discontinuity set up in a supersonic field of flow, through which the fluid undergoes a finite decrease in velocity accompanied by a marked increase in pressure, density, temperature, and energy.

slotted flap A high lift device consisting of a hinged airfoil attached to the leading or trailing edge of a wing that increases camber and uses BlC to increase the CL • sonic Pertaining to sound or the speed of sound.

sideslip A movement of an airplane such that the -relative wind has a component parallel to the lateral.axis.

sonic boom An explosion-like sound heard when a shock wave generated by a supersonic airplane reaches the ear.

sideslip angle ((3) The angle between the airplane's longitudinal axis and the relative wind, as seen from above.

sonic speed Speed equal to the speed of sound.

sideslip relative wind The component of the relative wind that is parallel to the airplane's lateral axis. sine (sin) In a right triangle, the function of an acute angle that is the ratio of the length of the opposite side to the length of the hypotenuse. sink rate See rate of descent. skin friction The friction of a fluid against the skin of an aircraft or other body; friction drag. slat The vane used in a slot, especially an automatic slot. When the slat deploys it forms a slot. slot High lift device that consists of a fixed vane that forms a gap between the leading edge of the wing and the body of the wing that allows airflow from below the wing to reach the upper surface and reenergize the boundary layer, delaying boundary layer separation. Also called fixed slot.

sound barrier A popular term for the large increase in drag that acts upon an aircraft approaching the speed of sound. span See wingspan. spanwise flow Airflovy that travels the span of the wing, parallel to the leading edge, normally root to tip. This airflow is not accelerated over the wing and therefore produces no pressure differential or lift. spar A principal spanwise beam in the structure of a wing. speed of sound The speed at which sound travels in a given medium under certain conditions. The speed of sound in air is primarily dependent on the temperature of the air mass. spin An asymmetrical aggravated stall resulting in autorotation.

1.A-15

spiral A maneuver in which an airplane ascends or descends in a helical (corkscrew) path at an angle of attack within the normal range of flight angles.

stagnation Loss of kinetic energy or velocity. Lack of motion. stall A condition of flight in which any increase in AOA will result in a decrease in Cl .

spiral divergence A motion resembling a spiraling descent, becoming steeper over time. Spiral divergence results from strong static directional stability and weak static lateral stability.

stall fence A plate or vane projecting from the upper surface of a wing, parallel to the airstream, used to . prevent spanwise flow. stalling angle of attack The angle of attack on an airfoil beyond which a stall occurs, i.e., CI.MAx. Beyond this angle of attack, the boundary layer is unable to remain attached to the wing, resulting in the decrease in Cl .

split flap A high lift device consisting of a plate deflected from the lower surface of the trailing edge of a wing that increases camber to increase the Cl . It produces a similar change in Cl as a plain flap, but a much larger increase in drag due to the great turbulent wake produced.

stall speed (Vs) The minimum true airspeed required to maintain level flight at CI.MAx AOA.

spoiler A movable control surface attached to the wing of an airplane, used to produce a rolling moment around the longitudinal axis by disturbing the flow of the boundary layer over one wing.

stall strip A sharply angled device attached near the wing's root on its leading edge to initiate a root first stall.

stabilator A movable control surface that replaces the horizontal stabilizer and elevators. stability The property of a body, such as an aircraft, to maintain its attitude or to resist displacement, and if displaced, to develop forces and moments that would return it to its original condition. stabilizer A fixed or adjustable airfoil or vane that provides stability for an aircraft, i.e., a fin, the horizontal or vertical stabilizer on an airplane.

standard atmosphere A reference set of average atmospheric conditions. standard datum plane (SOP) The actual elevation at which the barometric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg. standard rate tum (SRT) A tum in an aircraft with a three degree per second tum rate. static failure The breaking (or serious permanent deformation) of a material due to a steadily increasing, or sudden large application of force. This type of failure is often immediate and can occur without warning .

1.A-16

static pressure (P5) The weight of a column of air over a given area; the pressure each air particle exerts on another due to the weight of all the particles above; the potential energy per unit volume.

between the line of 25% chord and a line drawn perpendicular to the root chord. Also called sweepback. symmetric Exhibiting a correspondence of parts on opposite sides of a boundary or axis

static stability The initial tendency of an object to either move toward or away from equilibrium after a disturbance.

symmetric airfoil An airfoil in which the mean camber line is coincident with the chordline. Also called a zero camber airfoil.

static strength A measure of a material's resistance to a steadily increasing load or force.

tangent (tan) In a right triangle, the function of an acute angle that is the ratio of the length of the opposite side to the length of the adjacent side. A line, curve, or surface touching but not intersecting another line, curve or surface at only one point.

steady airflow Airflow in which at every point in the moving air mass, the pressure, density, temperature and velocity are constant. stiffness Resistance to deflection or deformation.

taper A gradual reduction in the chord length o(an airfoil from root to tip.

straight horn See unshielded horn. taper ratio (A.) The ratio of tip chord to root chord. The taper ratio affects the lift distribution and the structural weight of the wing.

streamline The path traced by a particle of air while in steady flow. streamtube An impenetrable tube formed by many streamlines. Streamtubes are closed systems.

temperature A measure of the average kinetic energy of air particles, expressed in degrees centigrade (OC), Fahrenheit eF), or Kelvin (K).

strength A measure of a material's resistance to load or force. subsonic Movement or flow at speeds below the speed of sound, generally at a Mach number of 0.0 to 0.75. supersonic Movement or flow at speeds above the speed of sound, generally at a Mach number of 1.2 to 5.0. sweep angle (A)

The angle measured

terminal velocity The maximum velocity an airplane can attain under given conditions. A vertical (zero-lift) dive path, normal gross weight, zero engine thrust, and standard sea-level air density are assumed. thickness The cross sectional height of an airfoil measured perpendicular to the chord line.

1.A-17

true airspeed (TAS) The velocity of an aircraft with respect to the air mass in which it is traveling. Airspeed value determined by correcting indicated airspeed for installation error, . compressibility, and density.

thrust available (TA) The thrust an engine produces under a specific velocity, density, and throttle setting. thrust axis The axis along which thrust is produced and the direction in which the force is generated.

true altitude The actual height above mean sea level. It is found by correcting calibrated altitude for temperature deviations from the standard atmosphere.

thrust deficit (To) The negative difference between · thrust available and thrust required. thrust excess (TE) The positive difference between thrust available and thrust required.

turbulence An agitated condition of air in which random fluctuations in velocity and direction occur. Airflow in which the velocity at any point varies erratically in magnitude and direction.

thrust horsepower The actual amount of horsepower that an engine-propeller system transforms into thrust, equal to shaft horsepower multiplied by propeller efficiency.

turbulent flow Boundary layer airflow characterized by turbulent, unsteady airflow.

thrust required (TR) The thrust required to overcome drag to maintain level equilibrium flight.

tum radius (r) One half the diameter of the circle an aircraft would fly if it completed a 360 degree tum.

total pressure The pressure a moving fluid would have if it were brought to a rest without losses. .

turn rate (00) The number of degrees of arc traversed per unit of time while turning, expressed in degrees/sec.

transonic Movement or flow at speeds very near the speed of sound, generally at a Mach number of 0.75 to

ultimate load The maximum load factor that the airplane can withstand without structural failure. It is 1.5 times the limit load.

1.2. trimmed flight A condition that exists when the sum of the moments acting around the center of gravity are equal to zero. The word ''trim'' often refers to the balance of control forces. trim tab A tab that is deflected to a position where it remains to keep the aircraft in the desired attitude.

unshielded hom The part of a control surface of longer chord than the rest of the surface, lying forward of the hingeline and entirely exposed to the relative wind, used for aerodynamic balance.

1.A-18

surface to the low-pressure region Vortex strength is above it. dependent upon the wing loading, gross weight, and speed of the generating airplane. Vortices from medium to heavy airplanes can be extremely hazardous to smaller airplanes. Also called wake turbulence, or jetwash.

upwash Chordwise airflow from the lower surface of an airfoil passing upward over the leading edge to the upper surface. Any upward airflow. V-n diagram A diagram describing the structural and aerodynamic limits within which an airplane must operate. vector A quantity that expresses both magnitude and direction. A vector quantity is represented by an arrow that displays direction and has a length proportional to magnitude.

weight The force at which a mass is attracted toward the center of the earth by gravity. wing An airfoil that produces a pressure differential when air is forced over it, resulting in a lifting force.

velocity (V) Speed, as referenced to another plane, object, or system. A vector quantity equal to speed in a given direction. True airspeed. velocity never-to-exceed (V NE) redline airspeed .

See

vertical axis An axis passing from top to bottom through the aircraft's center of gravity. Any movement developed around this axis is called yaw. vertical stabilizer A fin mounted approximately parallel to the plane of symmetry of an airplane, to which the rudder is attached. viscosity (f.1) A measure of a fluid's resistance to flow and shearing.

wing area (5) The surface area of a wing from wingtip to wingtip. The area within the outline of a projection of a wing on the plane of its chord, including that area lying within the fuselage or nacelles. With a swept wing, the area within the fuselage is contained within lines having the same sweep angle as the leading and trailing edges, fairings or fillets being ignored. wing loading (WL) . A ratio of airplane weight to the wing surface area. wing root The base of a wing, where it joins the fuselage or other main body of an airplane.

volume The size of the mass, or the amount of space occupied by an object. vortices I wingtip vortices A spiraling mass of air created at the wingtip, due to the airflow around the tip from the high-pressure region below the

wing section A cross section of a wing; the profile of a cross section or the area defined by a profile. wingspan (b) The length of a wing, measured from wingtip to wingtip. Also called span.

1.A-19

work (W) Work is done when a force acts on a body and it moves. Work is a scalar quantity measured in ft-Ibs. W =Fxs yaw Rotation around the vertical axis of an airplane. Yaw is controlled by the rudder.

1.A-20

APPENDIX Answers to Study Questions Appendix 1.8

Answers to Topic 1.1 Study Questions

1.

A vector quantity expresses both magnitude and direction, while a scalar quantity expresses only magnitude.

10.

=

11. 2.

Mass is the quantity of molecular material that comprise an object.

3.

Weight is the force at which a mass is attracted toward the center of the earth by gravity.

4.

The density of the air is the mass of air per unit of volume.

5.

A force is a push or pull exerted on a body. It tends to produce motion along a line. A moment is a tendency to produce motion about a point or axis. It is created by applying force to a lever arm to induce rotational motion about an axis.

6.

12.

An airplane traveling at a constant speed and direction, and an airplane parked on the flight line are in equilibrium if the sum of the forces and moments about the center of gravity equal zero.

13.

Trimmed flight exists when the sum of the moments acting about the C.G. equals zero, where equilibrium flight exists when the sum of the forces and moments about the C.G. equal zero.

14.

Newton's Second Law of Motion is the Law of Acceleration. "An unbalanced force (F) acting on a body produces an acceleration (a) in the direction of the force that is directly proportional to the force and inversely proportional to the mass (m) of the body." Various examples given in class, ask

=

Power is the rate of doing work.

8.

Energy is the ability to do work. T.E. = P.E. + K.E.

9.

Potential energy is the ability of a body to do work because of its position, or state of being.

Newton's First Law of Motion is the Law of Equilibrium - "A body at rest tends to remain at rest and a body in motion tends to remain in motion in a straight line at a constant velocity unless acted upon by some unbalanced force." --

Work is done when a force acts on a body and moves it, W F.s.

7.

Kinetic energy is the ability of a body to do work because of its motion. K.E. % m V 2 •

1.B-1

15.

16.

17. 1S.

instructor if unclear.

19.

Newton's Third Law of Motion is the Law of Interaction. "For every action there is an equal and opposite reaction ." Various examples given in class, ask instructor if unclear.

Air temperature decreases by 2.0°C per 1,000 feet until 36,000 feet. An isothermal layer (constant temperature of -56. 5°C) exists from 36,000 feet through approximately SO,OOO feet.

20.

Air density decreases with an increase in humidity.

21 .

Air viscosity is a measure of the air's resistance to flow and shearing . Air viscosity increases with an increase in temperature.

Air density decreases with an increase in altitude.

22.

Air temperature is a measure of the average kinetic energy of air particles.

The primary factor in determining the speed of sound in air is temperature.

23.

See Table 1.1-2.

24.

P p R T. Given a constant pressure, density will decrease with an increase in temperature.

Static pressure is the weight of a column of air over a given area. Static pressure decreases with an increase in altitude.

=

Answers to Topic 1.2 Study Questions

1.

2.

3.

A heavier-than-air fixed-wing aircraft that is driven by an enginedriven-propeller or a gas turbine jet and is supported by the dynamic reaction of airflow over its wings.

4.

The ailerons are attached to the wing.

5.

The rudder and ele vator are attached to the empennage.

The T -34 and T -37 use a semi-monocoque fuselage consisting of stringers, transverse frame members, and the skin.

6.

The elevator is used for longitudinal control.

7.

The rudder is the primary source of directional control.

S.

The center of gravity is the point at which all weight is considered to be concentrated.

full cantilever

1.B-2

9.

Longitudinal-roll; lateral-pitch; directional-yaw.

10.

Wingspan is the length of a wing, measured from wingtip to wingtip."

11.

Chord line is an imaginary straight line drawn through the leading and trailing edges of an airfoil. Chord is the length Of the chordline from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the airfoil. Average chord is the geometric average of every chord from the root to the tip. Tip chord is the length of the chord at the wing tip. Root chord is the length of the chord at the wing root.

12.

The apparent surface area of the wing, from wingtip to wingtip, including the area within the fuselage and nacelles. S = b x c.

13.

"Taper is the reduction in the chord from wing root to tip. Taper ratio is the ratio of tip chord to root chord. ').. = Cc IC R Sweep angle is the angle between a line drawn 25% aft of the leading edge and a line parallel to the lateral axis.

14.

The ratio of the wing span to the average chord. A 8-52 bomber would have a high aspect ratio. A high performance fighter would have a low aspect ratio.

15.

The angle formed between the chord line of an airfoil and the longitudinal axis of the airplane. It is fixed on most airplanes.

16.

The ratio of an airplane's weight to the surface area of it's wings. See formula on page 1.2-8.

17.

The angle between the spanwise inclination of the wing and the lateral axis.

Answers to Topic 1.3 Study Questions

1.

a total pressure sensor, the Pitot tube; a static pressure sensor, the static port; and a mechanism that determines the difference between the two in order to calculate dynamic pressure which is displayed in the cockpit as indicated airspeed.

p,A,V, = P~2V2' P is density, A is cross sectional area, and V is velocity. p may be cancelled if altitude remains constant, and airflow is subsonic.

2.

reduced by one-half

3.

PT = Ps + q. Total pressure remains constant in a closed system. Psis inversely related to q, if PT is constant.

4.

5.

The Pitot-static system consists of

1.8-3

For a given altitude, the pressure in the static pressure port of the airspeed indicator is constant for all airspeeds and all angles of attack.

6.

lAS is the instrument indication for the dynamic pressure the aircraft is creating during flight. True airspeed (TAS) is the actual velocity at which an aircraft moves though an air mass.

9.

260 TAS.

10.

120 knot headwind.

11.

Mach number is a ratio of the airplane's true airspeed (TAS) to the local speed of sound (LSOS). Critical Mach number is the free stream Mach number «1) that produces the first evidence of local sonic flow.

12.

Mach Number increases because TAS increases and the local speed of sound decreases.

TAS~~~ • lAS 7.

a·.

lAS will equal TAS when P = Po. As altitude increases with a constant lAS, TAS will increase. Decrease the indicated airspeed as altitude increases.

Answers to Topic 1.4 Study Questions 1.

D. The angle between the longitudinal axis and the horizon.

2.

Flight path is the path described by the airplane's center of gravity as it moves through the air mass.

3.

Relative wind is the apparent wind created by the airplane's movement through the air. It is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the flight path.

4.

C. Between the relative wind and the chordline

5.

Mean camber line is a line drawn halfway between the upper and lower surfaces of the wing. The mean camber line is above the chord line in a positive camber airfoil, below the chord line in a negative camber airfoil, and is

coincident with the chordline in a symmetric airfoil.

6.

Aerodynamic center is the point along the chord line where all changes in the aerodynamic force take p.lace.

7.

On the upper surface of the airfoil, dynamic pressure increases (due to an increase in airflow velocity), and static pressure decreases. A static pressure differential is created between the upper and lower surfaces which produces a force perpendicular to the relative wind.

a.

Aerodynamic force is a force that is the result of pressure and friction distribution over an airfoil. AF % P V'- S CF •

=

1.B-4

9.

Lift and drag.

18.

10.

l = q S C L = % pV 2 SCL. The pilot can normally control velocity, camber, and angle of attack.

A stall is a decrease in lift caused by an increase in ADA. Stall is caused by exceeding stall ADA.

19.

C.

20.

D. C L decreases and lift decreases.

21 .

Stall speed is the minimum true airspeed required to maintain level flight at C lMAx ADA.

11. 12.

Increase angle of attack. See Figure 1.4-10. A symmetric airfoil produces zero lift at zero a, while a cambered airfoil must be taken to some negative a to produce zero lift. Also, C lMAx for a cambered airfoil is higher but stall occurs at a lower a than on a symmetric airfoil.

13.

C LMAX ADA

14.

The lift vector is always perpendicular to the relative wind.

15

B. (3) A. (2) D. (4) E. (3)

16.

laminar flow is smooth, unbroken airflow that travels along well defined streamlines. Turbulent flow is disorganized and the streamlines break up. laminar flow produces little friction but is easily separated from the airfoil. Turbulent flow produces more friction, but does not separate from the airfoil as easily.

17.

Has no effect on stalling angle of attack

Vs=

22.

True stall speed increases with an increase in weight or altitude. Indicated stall speed increases with an increase in weight, but remains constant with an increase in altitude.

23.

B. power on, 9, 4

24.

High lift devices decrease stall speed by increasing CI.MAx. Camber change devices decrease stalling ADA, and BlC devices increase stalling ADA.

25.

Slots, slats, vortex generators, blown BlC, suction BlC. Slots take high pressure air from beneath the wing, increase its velocity through a nozzle and inject it into the lower levels of the boundary layer on the upper surface of the airfoil.

26.

A. drag

C. (1)

The primary feature of airflow separation is stagnation of the lower levels of the boundary layer. During boundary layer separation, the separation point moves forward along the airfoil.

2W pSCLMAX

1.8-5

Increases lift and increases

27.

28.

Plain flaps, split flaps, slotted flaps, fowler flaps , leading edge plain flaps, and leading edge slotted flaps. The T-34 and T-37 have slotted flaps . Fowler flaps produce the greatest increase in CLMAX '

29.

Geometric twist decreases the angle of incidence from root to tip, and aerodynamic twist decreases the camber from root to tip.

30.

Simultaneously add power, relax back stick pressure, and roll wings level (max, relax, roll).

To maintain aileron effectiveness in the early stages of stall, and provide an aerodynamic stall warning .

Answers to Topic 1.5 Study Questions

1.

Drag is the component of aerodynamic force that is parallel to the relative wind and acts in the same direction. p, V, S, camber, a, J.1. AR, compressibility.

5.

Form drag may be reduced by streamlining. Friction drag may be reduced by cleaning and polishing . Interference drag may be reduced by proper filleting and fairings.

2.

The coefficient of drag increases with an increase in angle of attack. Never.

6.

See Figure 1.5-6. Parasite drag increases as velocity increases.

7.

High pressure air in the leading edge stagnation point flows up and around the leading edge of the airfoil, creating "upwash". Some airflow also moves down around the trailing edge, and is called "downwash". On an infinite wing, upwash equals downwash with no net effect on lift.

3.

Parasite drag is all drag not associated with the production of lift. Parasite drag consists of form drag, friction drag, and interference drag.

4.

Dp

=q f.

(q) is dynamic pressure, (f) is the equivalent parasite area.

1.8-6

8.

9.

Airflow on a finite airfoil develops a spanwise component toward the wingtip. This spanwise airflow passes around the wingtip to the top of the wing, and causes the downwash to be approximately double the upwash. This increased downwash is responsible for decreasing effective lift, increasing drag, and forming wingtip vortices. Induced drag is the portion of total drag associated with the production of lift. It is formed on finite wings because the airflow moving around the wingtip increases downwash. Oownwash causes the lift vector to rotate aft. The component of this vector that is parallel to the free airstream relative wind is induced drag.

10.

0, k L2 I P V 2 b2. L is lift, V is velocity, p is density, b is wingspan, and k is a constant.

11.

Induced drag may be reduced by increasing velocity, wingtip devices, or by increasing wingspan .

12.

See Figure 1.5-10. Induced drag varies inversely with the square of velocity, and therefore decreases as velocity increases.

13.

OT

=Op + 0 =q S COT= 1

1/2pV2 SCOT. 14.

B,C

15.

The lift to drag ratio is a measure of the wing's efficiency. It is calculated using the ratio of the coefficients of lift and drag. Since both Cl and CD depend on angle of attack, the UO ratio will be determined by the angle of attack at which the airplane is flying.

16.

UO MAX is the greatest ratio of lift to drag. It is easily recognizable as the lowest point on the total drag curve. UOMAX is the most efficient AOA, the point of minimum total drag, the AOA where Op Oil and where the wing produces its greatest UO ratio.

=

=

Answers to Topic 1.6 Study Questions 1.

2.

The amount of thrust required to overcome drag and maintain equilibrium flight. The drag curve.

3.

C. at, slower than

4.

TA(or PA) is the amount of thrust (or power) the airplane's engine is currently producing at a given throttle setting, velocity and density.

T.V

p=--

325

1.8-7

5.

PT6A-25, 550,425

6.

J69-T -25A, 1025

7.

C. equal to UD MAX ADA, greater than UD MAX ADA

8.

10.

TA and PA increase as throttle/peL setting increases, decrease as altitude increases, and are unaffected by weight.

11.

An increase in altitude or weight causes a decrease in PE and T E•

D. greater than UD MAX , equal to UD MAx

9.

The TR and PRcurves move up and to the right with a weight increase. The T Rcurve shifts to the right and the PRshifts up and to the right with an altitude increase.

1.B-8

Answers to Topic 1.7 Study Questions 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

The power curves represent fuel flow for a turboprop, thrust curves represent fuel flow for a turbojet.

11.

Max angle of climb, 75 KIAS, 125 KIAS.

12.

An increase in altitude or weight will decrease the excess thrust and power resulting in a decrease in max rate of climb and max angle of climb.

13.

absolute ceiling

14.

At an AOA greater than LlDMAX and a velocity less than LlD MAX .

15.

1. b

16.

At LlDMA)(AOA and velocity.

17.

An increase in altitude will increa.se both glide range and glide endurance. An increase in weight decreases glide endurance but does not affeot glide range. A headwind will decrease glide range and have no effect on glide endurance.

Max endurance is the maximum time airborne on a given amount of fuel. Max range is the maximum distance over the ground on a given amount of fuel.

c.

Prop max range, jet max endurance Max endurance and max range performance will decrease. 80th airspeeds will increase. The higher TAS along with better fuel efficiency will yield an increase in range and endurance.

2. a

3. a

4. b

5. b

6.

A tailwind will increase max range but will not affect endurance. Max range airspeed will decrease, max endurance airspeed will not be affected.

7.

Fuel flow is greatly increased.

18.

D. 20 to 22 nautical miles

8.

Max angle of climb is the angle that achieves the greatest altitude for the minimum distance covered over the ground.

19.

Windmilling propeller

20.

A. Decrease in airspeed requires an increase in throttle

21.

If an airplane increases angle of attack without increasing the throttle, it will develop a deficit which causes either a deceleration or a descent.

9.

D. Full throttle, jets at UDMAX , props slower than LlDMAX

10.

B. Max rate of climb angle of

attack is smaller than max angle of climb. 1,8-9

Answers to Topic 1.8 Study Questions

1.

2.

Ailerons and spoilers are used for roll control. The rudder is used to yaw. The elevators are used for pitch control only.

An overhang provides aerodynamic balance for the T34C and T-37B aileron.

7.

A lead weight in the shielded horn provides mass balance for the T34C and T-37B elevator.

8.

They use conventional controls. In the conventional type control system the stick and rudder pedals are directly connected to the control surfaces via push-pull tubes, pulleys, cables and levers.

9.

The aileron trim tab is servo, the elevator is neutral, and the rudder has an anti-servo type trim tab. The servo type helps the pilot to deflect the aileron.

10.

The elevator uses a combination of bobweights and a downspring to provide the pilot with some artificial feel.

A nose-up pitch is created by moving the stick aft to move the elevator upward . ·

3.

A right roll is created by moving the stick rig ht to move the left aileron down and the right aileron up.

4.

Trimming reduces the force required to hold control surfaces in a position necessary to maintain a desired flight attitude. The elevator trim tab must be moved down to hold the elevator up, causing a nose-up pitch attitude.

5.

6.

A shielded horn provides aerodynamic balance for the rudder and elevator.

Answers to Topic 1.9 Study Questions 1.

2.

Static stability is the initial tendency of an object to move toward or away from its original equilibrium position. Dynamic stability is the tendency of an object to return toward or move away from equilibrium, with respect to time.

3.

Maneuverability and stability are inversely related .

4.

Longitudinal stability concerns the stability of the longitudinal axis around the lateral axis. This is the motion of pitch.

Divergent oscillation is associated with positive static and negative dynamic stability.

1.B-10

5.

The horizontal stabilizer is the greatest positive contributor to longitudinal static stability. The fuselage and straight wings are negative contributors to longitudinal static stability. Wing sweep is a positive contributor to longitudinal static stability. If the C.G. is forward of the neutral point, the overall airplane has positive longitudinal stability.

6.

Sweeping the wing aft moves the A.C. aft.

7.

Surface area and distance from the C.G.

8.

The angle between the longitudinal axis and the relative wind.

9.

Directional stability concerns the stability of the longitudinal axis around the vertical axis. This motion is yaw.

10.

11.

The fuselage is a negative contributor to directional static stability. The vertical stabilizer is the greatest positive contributor to directional stability. Straight and swept wings are positive contributors to directional static stability.

12.

Wing dihedral is the greatest positive contributor to lateral static stability. A low mounted wing is laterally destabilizing and a high mounted wing will be laterally stabilizing. Swept wings, dihedral, and the vertical stabilizer are laterally stabilizing. Anhedral is laterally destabilizing.

13.

Directional divergence is a result of negative directional static stability. Spiral divergence results from strong directional and weak lateral static stability. Dutch roll is the result of strong lateral and weak directional stability.

14.

Adverse yaw. The additional drag on the up-going wing due to increased camber.

15.

Proverse roll. Increased velocity on the outer wing creates more lift.

16.

Opposite rudder must be used. Remember "Dead engine, dead foot or step on the good engine."

17.

If the relative wind is below the thrust. line, the down-going blade will create more thrust and will y.aw the nose to the left.

18.

left, torque, left

Lateral stability concerns the stability of the lateral axis around the longitudinal axis. This motion is roll.

1.8-11

Answers to Topic 1.10 Study Questions

1.

2.

3.

An aggravated stall that results in autorotation . Stall and yaw. The up-going wing has a lower AOA, more lift, and less drag than the down-going wing, which has a higher AOA, therefore more drag and less lift. Altimeter, airspeed, angle of attack, and turn needle. Remember "AAAT". T-37 turn needle.

4.

A heavier aircraft will have a slower spin entry due to a greater inertial moment.

5.

The lower stall speed will result in a slower spin entry.

6.

Aggravated spin.

8.

Maintaining any control stick position other than full aft.

9.

Yes, if held for a prolonged time in a full aft stick stall (yaw will eventually occur because there is no aerodynamically perfect aircraft.

T-34 right

T-37 left

11 .

May transition to an inverted spin.

12.

Inadvertent trim actuation.

13.

One turn.

14.

Recover from erect stalled condition.

15. The aircraft may continue to spin inverted.

C. Break the stall and stop rotation.

7.

10.

16.

When full control deflection has been reached, nose remains below the horizon, rotaion has stabilized at an incresed rate.

17.

B.

18.

A.

19.

D.

Answers to Topic 1.11 Study Questions

1.

The total lift vector must increase in magnitude.

2.

The vertical component of lift must

equal airplane weight. The horizontal component turns the airplane. 1.B-1 2

3.

Load factor or G's.

4.

b. Angle of bank

5.

b.

6.

As the AOS approaches 90°, the load factor approaches infinity. An airplane can maintain 90° AOa only by creating lift on a source other than the wings, such as the fuselage, vertical stabilizer, ... etc.

7.

8.

11.

a. T-34C +4.5 G'S, -2.3 G'S b. T-37S +6.67 G'S, -2.67 G'S

12.

elastic limit, elastic limit

13.

Ultimate load factor is the maximum load factor that the airplane can withstand without structural failure. If you exceed the ultimate load factor, structural failure is imminent. 9.0 G's.

14.

Load factor. lAS is what is the pilot sees in the cockpit.

15.

Accelerated stall lines represent the maximum load factor that an airplane can produce based on airspeed. They are also called the lines of maximum lift (C~ AOA).

16.

Maneuvering speed is the lowest airsp~d that the airplane can produce its limit load factor. (Airspeed depends on altitude, weigh, etc.) For simplicity we use T-34 Va = 135 KIAS, T-37 Va = 235 KIAS.

17.

Maximum allowable speed. Redline airspeed is dependent upon MeRIT' airframe temperature, structural loads, or controllability.

18.

An increase in weight decreases the limit load factor and ultimate load factor, has no effect on the redline airspeed, and sweeps the accelerated stall lines to the right.

2.9

Stall speed increases during turning or maneuvering flight because of the increase in the load factor. Static strength is a resistance to a single application of force, fatigue strength is a resistance to a cyclic applicaton of force.

9.

Static failure is the breaking of a material due to a single application of a steadily increasing load or force. Fatigue failure is the breaking of a material due to a cyclic application of load or force .

10.

Limit load factor is the greatest load factor an airplane can sust ain without any risk of permanent deformation. Exceeding the limit load factor will cause overstress.

1.8-13

19.

20.

An increase in altitude will decrease the redline airspeed, but have no effect on limit load factor, ultimate load factor, or accelerated stall lines.

195 KIAS, 135 KIAS (maneuver 23. speed)

Configuration can greatly alter every component of the safe flight envelope. The SFE generally shrinks considerably.

21.

When encountering asymmetric loading, the pilot must adhere to the asymmetric limit load factor which is approximately two thirds of the limit load factor. Asymmetric loading will occur as a result of a rolling pullout, trapped fuel, or hung ordnance.

22.

Gust loading. In moderate turbulence, pilot-induced loading should be reduced to two thirds of the normal limit load factor, and any airspeed limitations must be strictly adhered to

24.

180 KIAS.

25.

Increasing, increase

26.

increase, decrease

27.

Simultaneously move control stick to left to begin rolling, add left rudder to overcome adverse yaw, pull aft stick to increase total lift, and increase throttle to overcome induced drag. Laterally neutralize stick approaching 30 degrees AOS. There's a little more to it than you'll find in video games!

28.

70

29.

outside, increase, decrease

30.

skid, decrease, increase, opposite sides

1.8 -14

Answers to Topic 1.12 Study Questions

1. VTO

wt t Alt

2.

3.

t t

HW

N/E

HLD

J..

5.

Weight.

V LDG IASTo

IAS LDG

6.

Takeoff distance increases.

t

i

i

7.

Humidity increases landing distance.

N/E

N/E

8.

increase, remain the same, increase

N/E NIE

N/E

9.

The 4-H Club (high, hot, humid, hea~y) and a tailwind.

10.

aerodynamic

11.

Runway A--FF, NF. Runway 8--FF, NF. Runway C-NF. Runway D--none.

12

Dry -17.5 kts Wet -13 kts Icy/Standing Water - 10 kts

13.

Ground effect does not affect total lift. Ground effect increases effective lift, reduces induced drag, total drag, and thrust required.

14.

More than 0.1, hydroplaning.

15.

Wingtip vortices.

16.

2 wingspans, 1 wingspan, heavy, slow, clean

17.

two

18.

When landing behind a large airplane, stay at or above the other

J,

-l-

Thrust, drag, lift, weight, and rolling friction. Thrust is the most unbalanced. Rolling friction is produced by the effects of friction between the tire and the runway during takeoff or landing. It is determined by multiplying the coefficient of friction by weight on wheels. It is greatest at the beginning of the takeoff roll, or the end of the landing rollout.

4.

airplane's flight path and land beyond his nosewheel touchdown point. When landing behind a departing large airplane, land well prior to his rotation point.

19.

Small airplanes should avoid operating within three rotor diameters of any hovering helicopter.

20.

D.

21.

Delay takoff until sheer condition no longer exists.

22.

Increase approach speeds by amount of shear potential. Be aware that increased landing speed increases landing distances. Go around if necessary.

22.

Low level wind shear alert system (LLWAS), NEXRAD doppler radar system. PI REPS (pilot reports), departure or arrival weather reports.

24.

Counter by adding power and raising the nose. Once back on glidepath, lower power setting to compensate for higher ground speed.

1.B-16

APPENDIX C Study Guide Appendix No. 1.C

sin =

opposite hypotenuse

KE=1/2mvl

TAS~IAS.~~

P=pRT AF = 1/2 P V 1 S C F

adjacent cos= hypotenuse S=bec tan = opposite adjacent

L = 1/2 P V 2S CL

A=CrIC R Vs=

WL= weight S

AR=bl c

P,A,V,= P2A2V2

lASs =

W=Fes

aE p S C LMAX

f3E PoS C LMAX

Pr= Ps+q F=mea

M=F-d TE=PE+KE

1 q=- PV 2 2

M= TAS LSOS

PE=mgh

Vs,.=

lASs,. =

2(W -TsinB) pS CLMA)(

1(W - T sinO)

PoS C LIAAX

2

D = 1/2 P V S CD

1.C-1

ROD = PD W

F R = f.J (W - L)

n=~ W

Vs;= SWC=

lASs; =

Wl g pSCLwJJFR+D-T)

2W n Po S C LMI•x V HYD = 9 ~Tire Pr essure

TA=m Vou,-V i" t

r=

THP=SHP. p.e.

gtan¢

VTO~I.2 Vp-~ ~

sinr = TE W

ROC=PE W

1.C-2

STANDARD DAY ALTITUDE

FEET

TEMPERATURE

LSOS KNOTS

PRESSURE in-Hg

DENSITY Slug/if x 103

CELSIUS

FAHRENHEIT

0

15.000

59 .000

661 .7

29.921

2.377

1,000 2.000 3,000 4,000 5,000

13.019 11 .038 9.056 7.076 5.094

55.434 51 .868 48 .302 44.735 41.169

659 .5 657.2 654.9 652.6 650.3

28.856 . 27.821 26.81 7 25.842 24.896

2.308 2.241 2.175 2.111 2.048

6,000 7,000 8,000 9,000 10,000

3.113 1.132 -0.850 -2.831 -4.812

37.603 34.037 30.471 26.905 23.338

648.7 645.6 643.3 640.9 638.6

23.978 23.088 22.225 21.388 20.577

1.987 1.927 1.869 1.811 1.756

11,000 12.000 13,000 14,000 15,000

-6.793 -8.774 -10.756 -12 .737 -14.718

19.772 16.206 12.640 9.074 5.508

636.2 633.9 631.5 629.0 626.6

19.791 19.029 18.292 17.577 16.886

1.701 1.648 1.596 1.546 1.496

16,000 17,000 18,000 19,000 20,000

-16.699 -18.680 -20.662 -22.643 -24.624

1.941 -1.625 -5.191 -8.757 -12.323

624.2 621.8 619.4 617.0 614.6

16.216 15.569 14.942 14.336 13.750

1.448 1.401 1.355 1.311 1.267

25 ,000

-34 .530

-30.154

602 .1

11 .103

1.066

30,000

-44.436

-47.985

589 .5

8.885

0.891

35 ,000

-54.342

-65.816

576.6

7.041

0.738

40 ,000

-56 .500

-69 .700

573.7

5.538

0.587

1.C-3

I

T-34C INFO PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS type semi-monocogue length 28 ft ~ in

FUSELAGE:

height at tail

~

ft

n

in

landing gear tricycle wingspan 33 ft i

WING

type cantilever

aspect ratio 6.2 : 1

loading 24.5 Ibs/ft2

angle of incidence 4 0

dihedral angle J..::.. geometric twist 3 .10

flap type slotted

PROP

type variable pitch

prop arc .L. ft ..Q.. in

prop clearance

n

in

rotation clockwise in

CONTROLS

system type conventional - reversible aerodynamic balancel artificial mass balance feel aileron

overhang

rudder shielded horn elevator

servo trim tabs anti-servo trim tabs

shielded horn

bobweights & downsprings

FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS CLrnax AOA 29 to 29.5 units stall warning: buffetting. rudder shakers. ADA indicator. ADA indexer spin indications:

airspeed

AOA

erect

80 - 100 kts 30 units

inverted

zero

crosswind limits 22 kts no flap

altimeter decreasing

2 - 3 units ~

turn needle

pegged

decreasing

pegged

kts full flap

redline airspeed 280 KIAS to 20,000' MSL, 245 KIAS to 25,000' MSL redline airspeed 150 KIAS (gear down),

120 KIAS (flaps down)

maneuver airspeed 135 KIAS

max turbulence 195 KIAS

limit load factor: + 4.5 g's, - 2.3 g's; standard rate turn

flaps down: + 2.0 g's, - ...1.Jl g's;

2. needlewidth. AOB = 15 - 20 % indicated airspeed 1.C-4

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

engine type PT6A-25 sea level flat rated SHP 550 at 1315 ft-Ibs torque sea level Navy limited SHP 425 at 1015 ft-Ibs torque critical altitude 14,000 ft

operational ceiling 25,000 ft

max endurance 420 ft-Ibs torque

max range 580 ft-Ibs torque

max AOe airspeed 75 KIAS

max ROe airspeed 100 KIAS

max level airspeed 190 KIAS

normal climb 120 KIAS

min sink rate 87 KIAS

max glide range 98 KIAS

operational glide 100 KIAS

1.C-5

T-37B INFO PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

FUSELAGE: height at tail

type semi-monocogue length 29 ft ~

ft

~

in

WING aspect ratio

landing gear tricycle wingspan 33 ft JJL in

type cantilever 6 :1

A in

flap type slotted

CONTROLS system type conventional - reversible aerodynamic and mass balance aileron - overhang

neutral servo

rudder and elevator - shielded horn

neutral servo

FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

stall warning: buffetting. Below approx 72 Knots and 25%or more flaps, spoilers provide artificial stall warning. spin indications: erect

altimeter

turn needle

decreasing

pegged

inverted

decreasing

crosswind limits 17.5 kts dry,

~

pegged kts wet,

-.lll kts icy/standing water

redline airspeed 382 KIAS or .7 mach whichever occurs first. redline airspeed 150 KIAS (gear down), 135 KIAS (flaps down) maneuver airspeed 235 KIAS

max turbulence 180 KIAS

limit load factor: + 6.67 g's, - 2.67 g's; standard rate turn

L

needlewidth, AOB = 30°

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

engine type J69-T-25A sea level flat rated thrust 1025 at 100% operational ceiling 25,000 ft max AOC airspeed 125 KIAS

RPM

max endurance 125 KIAS max ROC airspeed 180 KIAS to 10,000' 160 KIAS above 10,000' 1.C-6

max level airspeed 275 KIAS

min sink rate 125 KIAS

max glide range 125 KIAS

operational glide 100 KIAS

CONTRIBUTIONS TO STATIC STABILITY [COMPONENT

[ LONG [

LAT

OIR

+

Straight Wings Swept I Delta Wings

+

+

+

Fuselage ++

Horizontal Stabilizer N.P. aft of C.G.

+

Vertical Stabilizer

+

Dihedral Wings

++

Anhedral Wings +

High-Mounted Wings Low Mounted Wings . . ...

",,),,I L

1.C-7

>,_. ... .

.

..,.,

~~ ._

,,'

.,~ ---'-;

~_"

f~

PERFORMANCE STUDY GUIDE

D TA TR TE PA PR PE

WEIGHT INCREASE

ALTITUDE GEAR FLAPS INCREASE DOWN DOWN ,.!,

• •>

~T

~

i

~i

.J,

.J,

,.!,

,.!,

,.!, ~T

~T

i

~i

,.!,

,.!,

.J,

.J,

"The heavier or the higher, the faster the flyer."

PERFORMANCE

Curve & V vs L/DMAX

JET PROP WTi ALTi TWi

Gear,.!,!

Flap-J..

T= Fuel Flow T> AOC MaxTE T= ROC Max PE p> GE Min Po p< GR Min To T= END RNG

Fuel Flow

P<

,.!,

i

p= T< P= P<

.J.-

T

T

.J.-

-.l,.!, .J,

.J.-

,.!,

-.l,.!,

T=

1.C-8

-.'

..... ~ .~"' --fk -....,.

.J.-

T i

~

'_.-1

t~ .." ~';f: ,

T

-

,.!,

-lr .J,

Thrus1 Required

VELOOITV (TAS)

Figure 1

Thrust Available (jet)

Thrust Available (prop) (Futt PeL.)

T .

(FulThrc1llll)

A

~

I ~

(HIIf~)

TA :

~I'TY

(TAS)

Rgurea

Figure 2

.Max Thrust Excess (jet)

va..ocrrY

Max Th'ruS1 Excess (prop

(TAS)

Figure &

F'lgure 4 1.C-9

Power Required

.......

,..

.~ ................ . ,.

.... l,ID r.1.1

:

~

VELOClTY (lAS)

Figure 6

Power Available Get)

Power Available (prop) (FUIIPCL.)

{Half POt.:

VELOCITY (TAS)

VELOCITY (TAB>

Figure 7

Figure 8

Max Power Excess

Max Power Excess (prop) (FUll peL)

Uet) PR ~.,~ ,

•• •• • J

........ ............ ,.

VI!LOCIlY (TAS)

VELOCrTY (TAS)

Figure 9

Figure 10

1.C-10

SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS a

angle of attack

c

average chord

J3

sideslip angle

CAS

calibrated airspeed

r

climb or glide angle

Co

coefficient of drag

e

pitch attitude

CDi

coefficient of induced drag

A

taper ratio

CoP

coefficient of parasite drag

A

sweep angle

CF

.coefficient of aerodynamic force

J.l

viscosity or coefficient of friction

CG

center of gravity

p

air density

CL

coefficient of lift

cjl

angle of bank

CLMAX

maximum coefficient of lift

(0

rate of turn

cR

root chord

<

less than

Cr

tip chord

>

greater than

d

moment arm distance

~

approximately equal to

D

drag

a

acceleration

D

Adensity altitude

A

area

DI

induced drag

AC

aerodynamic center

Dp

parasite drag

AF

aerodynamic force

Dr

total drag

AOA

angle of attack

EAS

equivalent airspeed

AOC

angle of climb

f

equivalent. parasite area

AR

aspect ratio

F

force

b

wing span

FF

fuel flow

1.C-11

FR

rolling friction

P

pressure

G

acceleration of gravity

p.e.

propeller efficiency

GS

groundspeed

P.E.

potential energy

lAS

indicated airspeed

PA

pressure altitude

IASloG

indicated landing speed

PA

power available

lASs

indicated stall speed

Po

power deficit

lASs.

indicated accelerated stall speed

PE

power excess

PR

power required

IAS sp

indicated power-off stall speed

Ps

static pressure

IASTO

indicated takeoff speed

PT

total pressure

k

constant

q

dynamic pressure

K.E.

kinetic energy

Q

torque

UD

lift to drag ratio

r

radius of turn

UD MAX

maximum lift to drag ratio

ROC

rate of climb

L

lift

RW

relative wind

LEFF

effective lift

s

distance of displacement

LSOS

local speed of sound

SLOG

landing distance

m

mass

STO

takeoff distance

M

Mach number

S

wing surface area

MeRIT

critical Mach number

SHP

shaft horsepower

n

load factor

SRT

standard rate turn

NP

neutral point

T

temperature or thrust

NWLO

nosewheel liftoff speed

TA

thrust available

NWTD

nosewheel touchdown speed

To

thrust deifict

1.C-12

APPENDIX D Bibliography Appendix No. 1.D Comeaux, J. Aerodynamics for Pilots (ATC Pamphlet 51-3), Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1979. Dommasch, Daniel 0 .; Sherby, Sydney S.; and Connolly, Thomas F. Airplane Aerodynamics, 4th Ed., New York: Pitman Publishing Corporation, 1967. Etkin, Bernard. Dynamics of Flight-Stability and Control, New York: Wiley, 1982. Hurt, Hugh. Aerodynamics for Naval AViators (NAVWEPS DO-80T-8m., Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1960. Kuethe, Arnold M.; and Chow, Chuen-Yen. Foundations of Aerodynamics. New York: Wiley, 1976. Shevell, Richard S. Fundamentals of Flight, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1983. Smith, Hubert C. The Illustrated Guide to Aerodynamics. 2nd Ed., Blue Ridge Summit, PA: TAB Books, 1992. Office of the Chief of Naval Operations. T-34C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR 01T34AAC-1), Commander Naval Air Systems Command, 1988. Office of the Secretary of the Air Force. Flight Manual USAF Series T-37B Aircraft. T.O. 1T-37B-1, 1990. U.S. Department of Transportation. Pilot's Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge , Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1980.

1.D-1

(This page intentionally left blank)

1.0-2

APPENDIX E Change Recommendation Appendix No. 1.E TO BE FILLED IN BY ORIGINATOR AND FORWARDED TO MODEL MANAGER FROM (originator)

Date

TO (Model Manager) Aerodynamics Branch Officer

NAVAVSCOLSCOM

Name of Student Guide Fundamentals of Aerodynamics Recommendation (be specific)

I

Revision Date October 1996

Change Date

!Chapter !P.age ! Paragraph

CONTINUE ON BACK IF NEEDED

JUstification (indicate references If needed)

I Rank

SIGNATURE

I

Title

Address of Unit or Command TO BE FILLED IN BY MODEL MANAGER (Return to Originator)

I

FROM

DATE

TO

Your change recommendation dated _____ is acknowledged. It will be held for action of the review conference planned for to be held at NAVAVSCOLSCOM. MODEL MANAGER

1.E-1

(This .page intentionally left blank)

1.E-2